WO2020259206A1 - Method, apparatus and system for transmitting parameters - Google Patents

Method, apparatus and system for transmitting parameters Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020259206A1
WO2020259206A1 PCT/CN2020/093275 CN2020093275W WO2020259206A1 WO 2020259206 A1 WO2020259206 A1 WO 2020259206A1 CN 2020093275 W CN2020093275 W CN 2020093275W WO 2020259206 A1 WO2020259206 A1 WO 2020259206A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
node
protocol layer
ethernet protocol
layer parameters
network device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/093275
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
罗海燕
黄曲芳
戴明增
曾清海
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020259206A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020259206A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/08Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/11Allocation or use of connection identifiers

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a parameter transmission method, device and system.
  • the industrial Internet of Things which is currently a research hotspot, mainly includes: line controllers, machine controllers, and equipment (such as sensors) There are three types of nodes (actuator, I/O box, etc.) (hereinafter referred to as IIoT nodes).
  • IIoT mainly includes: the communication between the line controller and the machine controller (controller to controller-1, C-2-C-1), the communication between the machine controller and the machine controller (C-2- C-2), communication between the machine controller and the device (controller to device, C-2-D), and communication between the devices (device to device, D-2-D) are four types of communication.
  • different IIoT nodes in the traditional IIoT are connected by wires, and after the IIoT is wireless, different IIoT nodes can communicate through the Ethernet (ethernet) protocol based on the wireless network architecture.
  • the line controller located in the core network communicates with the machine controller through core network equipment and base stations.
  • many Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be used to optimize the underlying transmission and reduce the transmission overhead, thereby achieving cross-layer optimization.
  • the core network device may send the message cycle, message size, and message arrival time to the base station to optimize the data transmission of the time sensitive network (TSN) service.
  • TSN time sensitive network
  • the embodiments of the application provide a parameter transmission method, device, and system, which can transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters during the establishment of a PDU session, so that wireless access network equipment can optimize data transmission based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and improve Optimized performance of wireless access network equipment.
  • the radio access network device receives the first message from the first node, and sends the first message to the core network device, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the Protocol data unit PDU session.
  • the radio access network device receives a second message from the core network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters Including one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; among them, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used for optimization Data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device.
  • the core network device transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the process of establishing or modifying the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node and the wireless access network device based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transmission between wireless access network devices.
  • the second message includes the identifier of the foregoing PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the foregoing PDU session.
  • the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to one QFI; or, the second message includes multiple QFIs, and the foregoing multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in corresponds to each of the multiple QFIs.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the radio access network device sends the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node.
  • Network protocol layer parameters, the first channel identifier is used to indicate a channel between the first node and the second node, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or,
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the first node is connected to the radio access network device through the second node.
  • the embodiment of the application transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters
  • the data is transmitted between the second node and the wireless access network device; on the other hand, because the access network device also sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second node, the second node can also be based on the Ethernet protocol layer
  • the parameters optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the radio access network device sends a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate A channel between the second node and the above-mentioned wireless access network device.
  • the wireless access network device since the wireless access network device sends the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, the second node can determine to connect to the wireless connection after receiving uplink data from the first channel of the first node. The second channel through which the network access device sends the uplink data.
  • the foregoing first channel identifier is a logical channel identifier, a data radio bearer identifier, or a side link data radio bearer identifier.
  • the foregoing second channel identifier is a logical channel identifier or a data radio bearer identifier.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the radio access network device sends a third message to the first node, and the third message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the one The QFI corresponding to the group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters or each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in multiple groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters is used for The first node determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data.
  • the wireless access network device sends the QFI corresponding to the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node, so that the first node can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates. .
  • the core network device receives a first message from the first node, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
  • the core network device sends a second message to the radio access network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, and the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters Including one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; among them, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used for optimization Data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device.
  • the technical effects brought about by the second aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought about by the above-mentioned first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second message includes the identifier of the PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the PDU session.
  • the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to one QFI; or, the second message includes multiple QFIs, and the foregoing multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in corresponds to each of the multiple QFIs.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the core network device sends a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI or QFI corresponding to the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node.
  • the core network device sends a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI or QFI corresponding to the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node.
  • Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the multiple groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol parameters is used for the Ethernet protocol layer of the first node according to the uplink data
  • the parameter determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data. Based on this solution, since the core network device sends the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter to the first node, the first node can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates.
  • a parameter transmission method and corresponding device are provided.
  • the first node sends a first message to the core network device, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the protocol data unit PDU session of the first node.
  • the first node receives the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device.
  • QFI is used by the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data, where the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to QFI, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following : Data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the first node can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates.
  • the first protocol layer entity of the first node obtains Ethernet protocol layer parameters
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival Time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the first protocol layer entity of the first node sends the Ethernet protocol layer parameter to the second protocol layer entity of the first node, where the Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used to optimize data between the first node and the second node transmission.
  • the first protocol layer entity of the first node can send Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node, the second protocol layer entity of the first node can directly use the Ethernet protocol layer Parameters are optimized. Therefore, on the one hand, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be transmitted between different protocol layers in the first node; on the other hand, the first node can directly obtain the Ethernet protocol layer parameters, which can reduce the complexity of the first node transmission optimization degree.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the first node obtains subnet topology information of the second node, and the subnet topology information is used for the first protocol of the first node
  • the layer entity determines the format of the data sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node. Based on this solution, the first node can also perform transmission optimization according to the subnet topology information reported by the second node, so that the optimization performance of the first node can be improved.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the first node obtains the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, and the first protocol layer identifier of the second node is used to determine the direction The interface identifier corresponding to the data sent by the second node. Based on this solution, the first node can also perform transmission optimization according to the first protocol layer identifier of the second node reported by the second node, so that the optimization performance of the first node can be improved.
  • the foregoing first protocol layer entity includes an application layer entity or an Ethernet protocol layer entity.
  • the foregoing second protocol layer entity includes one or more of the following: a radio link control RLC layer entity, a medium access control MAC layer entity, or a physical PHY layer entity.
  • a communication device for implementing the above-mentioned various methods.
  • the communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above.
  • the core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
  • the communication device includes a module, unit, or means corresponding to the foregoing method, and the module, unit, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or hardware execution of corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • a communication device including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above.
  • the core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
  • a communication device including: a processor; the processor is configured to couple with a memory, and after reading an instruction in the memory, execute the method according to any of the foregoing aspects according to the instruction.
  • the communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above.
  • the core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a communication device, enable a computer to execute the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above.
  • the core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a communication device, enables a computer to execute the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above.
  • the core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
  • a communication device for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system
  • the communication device includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in any of the above aspects.
  • the communication device further includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the technical effects brought about by any of the design methods of the fifth aspect to the tenth aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the first aspect or the second aspect or the third aspect or the fourth aspect. I won't repeat them here.
  • a communication system which includes the radio access network device described in the first aspect and the core network device described in the second aspect.
  • a communication system in a twelfth aspect, includes the second node described in the first and fourth aspects, the radio access network device described in the first aspect, and the radio access network device described in the second aspect. Core network equipment.
  • a communication system which includes the radio access network device described in the first aspect, the core network device described in the second aspect, and the first node described in the third aspect.
  • a communication system which includes the second node described in the first and fourth aspects, the radio access network device described in the first aspect, and the communication system described in the second aspect.
  • a communication system in a fifteenth aspect, includes the second node described in the first and fourth aspects and the first node described in the fourth aspect.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an existing industrial Internet of Things structure
  • FIG. 2a is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 2b is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 2c is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 4 is a first schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is a second schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a third schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a fifth schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a sixth flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a seventh schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless access network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a core network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a first node provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another first node provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • At least one item (a) refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or plural items (a).
  • at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
  • words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with substantially the same function and effect. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the quantity and order of execution, and words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the difference.
  • orthogonal frequency-division multiple access OFDMA
  • single-carrier frequency-division multiple access single carrier FDMA
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency-division multiple access
  • 5G fifth generation
  • system can be replaced with "network”.
  • the OFDMA system can implement wireless technologies such as evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) and ultra mobile broadband (UMB).
  • E-UTRA is an evolved version of the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • 3rd generation partnership project 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) uses the new version of E-UTRA in long term evolution (LTE) and various versions based on LTE evolution.
  • the 5G communication system is the next generation communication system under study.
  • 5G communication systems include non-standalone (NSA) 5G mobile communication systems, standalone (SA) 5G mobile communication systems, or NSA’s 5G mobile communication systems and SA’s 5G mobile communication systems.
  • NSA non-standalone
  • SA standalone
  • 5G mobile communication systems or SA’s 5G mobile communication systems and SA’s 5G mobile communication systems.
  • Communication Systems may also be applicable to future-oriented communication technologies, all of which are applicable to the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the above-mentioned communication system applicable to the present application is only an example, and the communication system applicable to the present application is not limited to this, and the description is unified here, and the details are not repeated below.
  • the communication system 10a includes a first node 20, a wireless access network device 30, and a core network device 40, and the core network device 40 is connected to an IIoT server.
  • the IIoT server in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as an IIoT controller, which may include a machine controller or a line controller, which is uniformly described here, and the description is applicable to all the embodiments of the present application, and will not be repeated below.
  • an IIoT controller which may include a machine controller or a line controller, which is uniformly described here, and the description is applicable to all the embodiments of the present application, and will not be repeated below.
  • the first node 20 sends a first message to the core network device 40, and the first message is used to request the core network device 40 to establish or modify a protocol data unit (PDU) session of the first node 20, and the core network device 40 After receiving the first message, the device 40 sends a second message to the radio access network device 30.
  • the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node 20.
  • the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, Receive window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Among them, the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node 20 and the wireless access network device 30.
  • the core network device transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the process of establishing or modifying the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node 20 and the first node 20 based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transmission between wireless access network devices 30.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiments of the present application only involves some steps in the PDU session establishment or modification process.
  • steps in the PDU session establishment or modification process reference may be made to the prior art, which is explained here in a unified manner. The embodiments will not be repeated.
  • the first node 20 in the communication system 10a is an IIoT node, which may be a device in the industrial Internet of Things, such as a sensor, an actuator, and an I/O box. Etc.; or, it can also be a machine controller in the Industrial Internet of Things.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides another communication system 10b.
  • the communication system 10b includes a first node 20, a second node 60, a wireless access network device 30, and a core network device 40, and the core network device 40 is connected to an IIoT server.
  • the first node 20 sends a first message to the core network device 40.
  • the first message is used to request the core network device 40 to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node 20.
  • the core network device 40 After receiving the first message, the core network device 40 sends The radio access network device 30 sends a second message, which is used to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node 20.
  • the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the radio access network device 30 After receiving the second message, the radio access network device 30 sends to the second node the identity of the first node, the first channel identity, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identity, and the Ethernet corresponding to the first channel identity
  • the protocol layer parameters include a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the embodiment of the application transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters
  • the data of 20 is transmitted between the second node 60 and the radio access network device 30; on the other hand, because the radio access network 30 device also sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second node 60, the second node is also The data transmission between the first node 20 and the second node 60 can be optimized based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the first node 20 in the communication system 10b is an IIoT node, which may be a device in the IIoT, such as a sensor, an actuator, an I/O box, etc.
  • the second node 60 is an IIoT node, which can be a machine controller in the IIoT, which can be deployed in other wireless access network equipment (that is, the type of the second node can be a wireless access network equipment), or it can be deployed In the terminal device (that is, the type of the second node may be a terminal device).
  • the first node 20 may request association from the second node 60.
  • the second node 60 acts as a relay to assist the first node 20 and Signaling and data transmission between radio access network devices 30.
  • the second node 60 communicates with the wireless access network device 30 through the Uu port. If the type of the second node 60 is the wireless access network device 30, the second node 60 communicates with the first node 20 through the Uu port.
  • the type of the second node 60 is a terminal device, and the second node 60 communicates with the first node 20 through a sidelink (SL) port.
  • SL sidelink
  • the second node 60 can also notify the radio access network device 30 of the association relationship.
  • the second node 60 can send the radio access network device 30 the information of the first node 20 Identification, where the identification of the first node 20 may be one of the identification assigned by the second node 60 to the first node 20, the identification of the first node 20 in the side link, or the application layer identification of the first node 20 Or more.
  • the communication system 10c includes a first node 20 and a second node 60.
  • the IIoT service data is only transmitted between the first node 20 and the second node 60, and the service data does not need to reach the core network.
  • the first protocol layer entity of the first node 20 obtains Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and sends the obtained Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include the following: Or more: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node 20 and the second node 60. Based on this solution, on the one hand, Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be transmitted between different protocol layers in the node; on the other hand, the first node 20 can be reduced to optimize the data transmission between the first node 20 and the second node 60. the complexity.
  • the first node 20 in the communication system 10c can be a machine controller in the IIoT, which can be deployed in other radio access network equipment (that is, the type of the first node 20 can be a radio access network equipment ), at this time, the first node 20 communicates with the second node 60 through the Uu port; or, it can also be deployed in a terminal device (that is, the type of the first node 20 may be a terminal device), at this time, the first node 20 passes through The SL port communicates with the second node 60.
  • the second node 60 may be a device in the IIoT, such as a sensor (sensor), an actuator (actuator), an access device (I/O box), etc.
  • the radio access network device 30 is a device that connects the first node 20 to the wireless network, and may be an evolutionary base station in LTE.
  • B eNB or eNodeB
  • base station gNB or ng-eNB in 5G network or public land mobile network (PLMN)
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • BNG broadband network service gateway
  • BNG broadband network gateway
  • 3rd generation partnership project 3GPP
  • the base stations in the embodiments of the present application may include base stations of various forms, such as macro base stations, micro base stations (also referred to as small stations), access points, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the radio access network device 30 in the embodiment of the present application may be composed of a centralized unit (CU) and one or more distributed units (DU).
  • CU and DU can be understood as the division of radio access network equipment from the perspective of logical functions. Wherein, the CU and DU may be physically separated or deployed together, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the CU and DU can be connected through an interface, for example, an F1 interface.
  • CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the functions of the radio link control (RLC) protocol layer, the media access control (MAC) protocol layer, and the physical (PHY) protocol layer are set in the DU.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • the CU can be composed of the CU control plane (CU-CP) and the CU user plane (CU-UP).
  • CU-CP and CU-UP can be understood as slave logic functions to the CU
  • the angle is divided.
  • CU-CP and CU-UP can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network.
  • the functions of the PDCP protocol layer corresponding to the RRC protocol layer and the signaling radio bearer (signal radio bearer, SRB) are set in the CU-CP
  • the data radio bearer (DRB) is set in the CU-UP.
  • the function of the SDAP protocol layer may also be set in the CU-UP.
  • the core network device 40 is a core network element.
  • the core network device 40 may be a serving gateway (serving gateway, SGW in the LTE core network architecture). ), mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME), etc.; or, it can also be the user plane function (UPF) network element in the 5G core network architecture, access and mobility management function (access and mobility).
  • UPF user plane function
  • AMF Management function
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to implement a wireless communication function, such as a terminal or a chip that can be used in a terminal.
  • the terminal may be a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a terminal unit, a terminal station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, and wireless communication in a 5G network or a future evolved PLMN.
  • the access terminal can be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices or wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, industrial control (industrial) Wireless terminal in control), wireless terminal in self-driving, wireless terminal in remote medical, wireless terminal in smart grid, wireless terminal in transportation safety (transportation safety) Terminal, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, etc.
  • the terminal can be mobile or fixed.
  • the first node 20, the second node 60, the radio access network device 30, and the core network device 40 in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as communication devices, which may be a general-purpose device or a dedicated device.
  • communication devices may be a general-purpose device or a dedicated device.
  • Equipment this embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this.
  • the first node 20, the second node 60, the radio access network device 30, or the core network device 40 in FIG. 2a, FIG. 2b, or FIG. 2c may use the communication in FIG. 3
  • the device (or communication device) 50 is implemented.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 50 provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 50 includes one or more processors 501, a communication bus 502, and at least one communication interface (in FIG. 3, the communication interface 504 and one processor 501 are taken as an example for illustration), optional
  • the memory 503 may also be included.
  • the processor 501 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more programs for controlling the execution of the program of this application. integrated circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • the communication bus 502 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect standard
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 3 to represent, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the communication bus 502 is used to connect different components in the communication device 50 so that different components can communicate.
  • the communication interface 504 may be a transceiver module for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (RAN), wireless local area networks (WLAN), etc.
  • the transceiver module may be a device such as a transceiver or a transceiver.
  • the communication interface 504 may also be a transceiver circuit located in the processor 501 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
  • the memory 503 may be a device having a storage function. For example, it can be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can be stored by a computer Any other media taken, but not limited to this.
  • the memory may exist independently and is connected to the processor through the communication line 502. The memory can also be integrated with the processor.
  • the memory 503 is used to store computer execution instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and the processor 501 controls the execution.
  • the processor 501 is configured to execute computer-executable instructions stored in the memory 503, so as to implement the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 501 may also perform processing-related functions in the parameter transmission method provided in the following embodiments of the present application, and the communication interface 504 is responsible for communicating with other devices or communication networks.
  • the application embodiment does not specifically limit this.
  • the computer-executable instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program code, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 501 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 3.
  • the communication device 50 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 501 and the processor 508 in FIG. 3. Each of these processors can be a single-CPU (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • the processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
  • the communication device 50 may further include an output device 505 and an input device 506.
  • the output device 505 communicates with the processor 501 and can display information in various ways.
  • the output device 505 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait.
  • the input device 506 communicates with the processor 501 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 506 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a parameter transmission method.
  • the first node sends a first message to the core network device, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the For the PDU session, after receiving the first message, the core network device sends a second message to the radio access network device.
  • the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
  • the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, Receive window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used for the wireless access network device to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device.
  • the core network device transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the process of establishing or modifying the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node and wireless network based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transmission between access network devices.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as an existing application layer, or as a new protocol layer between the existing application layer and the PDCP layer;
  • the Ethernet protocol layer in the embodiments of this application can be understood as the existing application layer, and can also be understood as a new protocol layer between the existing application layer and the SDAP layer. This is not specifically limited.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in this embodiment of the application is applied to the communication system as shown in FIG. 2a.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the parameter transmission method includes the following steps:
  • the first node sends a first message to the core network device through the radio access network device.
  • the core network device receives the first message from the first node through the wireless access network device.
  • the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
  • the first message may be a non-access stratum (NAS) message, such as a PDU session establishment request (PDU session establishment request) message or a PDU session modification request (PDU session modification request) message.
  • the first node may include the first message in the RRC message, and send the first message through the RRC connection with the radio access network device. After receiving the RRC message containing the first message from the first node, the radio access network device forwards the first message to the core network device.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • PDU session establishment request PDU session establishment request
  • PDU session modification request PDU session modification request
  • the core network device executes the following step S402 to establish or modify the core network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node and the radio access network device.
  • the user plane tunnel of the S1 interface or NG3 interface corresponding to the PDU session of the first node where the data transmission channel between the core network device and the radio access network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node is modified It can be understood as modifying the quality of service (QoS) flow included in the data transmission channel or modifying the user plane tunnel address.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the core network device sends a second message to the wireless access network device.
  • the radio access network device receives the second message from the core network device.
  • the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session requested by the first node to establish or modify.
  • the second message includes one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters for optimizing data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet Size, packet period, packet arrival time, packet lifetime, receive window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the second message may be a PDU session resource setup request (PDU session resource setup request) message or a PDU session resource modification request (PDU session resource modification request) message.
  • the second message may include the identifier of the PDU session and the user plane tunnel address on the core network device side corresponding to the PDU session (for example, tunnel endpoint identifier or internet protocol address (IP)).
  • IP internet protocol address
  • the radio access network device After the radio access network device receives the second message, it can send a reply message to the core network device.
  • the reply message can include the user plane tunnel address on the radio access network device side. So far, the core corresponding to the PDU session of the first node The user plane tunnel between the network device and the wireless access network device is successfully established or modified.
  • the radio access network device can notify the first node to establish or modify the DRB between the first node and the radio access network device, and the related process can be Refer to the prior art, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second message also includes one or more QoS flows and corresponding QoS parameters (in order to distinguish them from Ethernet protocol layer parameters, they will be referred to as cellular network QoS parameters later), where each QoS flow uses a quality of service flow Identifier (QoS flow identifier, QFI).
  • QoS flow identifier QoS flow identifier
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be considered as the PDU session granularity.
  • the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may correspond to the identifier of the PDU session of the first node; or, if the PDU session of the first node includes a QoS flow, that is, the PDU session of the first node corresponds to a QFI, then the set of Ethernet The network protocol layer parameters correspond to the QFI that identifies the one QoS flow.
  • the data structure in the second message may be as follows:
  • the second message includes multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters
  • the PDU session of the first node includes multiple QoS flows, that is, when the PDU session of the first node corresponds to multiple QFIs, the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters
  • Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in each corresponds to one of the multiple QFIs.
  • the core network device may include the mapping relationship between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI as shown in Table 1 in the second message.
  • Ethernet protocol layer parameters QFI corresponding to Ethernet protocol layer parameters
  • the first set of parameters QFI 1 The second set of parameters QFI 2
  • mapping relationship between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI shown in Table 1 can be represented by the following data structure of the second message:
  • the data structure in the second message may be similar to that in the second message including multiple sets of Ethernet protocols
  • the difference in the data structure of the layer parameter is that the QoS flow establishment/modification request list in the data structure only contains one QFI and a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the QFI.
  • the data packet size (message size) represents the size of the transmitted data packet
  • the data packet period (message period) represents the transmission period of the data packet
  • the arrival time of a data packet can be the time when the data packet is estimated by the IIoT server to reach the wireless access network device, or it can be the time when the downlink data packet arrives at the first node. In addition, when the arrival time of a data packet is determined, The arrival time of each data packet can be determined according to the data packet cycle;
  • Data packet survival time means that after the data packet transmission fails, the sender needs to start the timer time. The sender must resend the failed data to the receiver within the data packet lifetime, otherwise it will cause the receiver Equipment off
  • the receiving window indicates the time range for the receiver to receive the data packet, and only the data packet received within the receiver's receiving window can be correctly processed by the receiver;
  • Ethertype can include EtherCAT, Ethernet Powerlink, Sercos III, Ethernet/IP, Profinet, CC-Link IE Field and Modbus TCP, etc.;
  • Ethernet packet info can include Ethernet padding information (ethernet padding info), Ethernet frame header size, Ethernet frame sub-headers information, and node information and service information corresponding to the sub-headers. Type (for example, whether the service is a real-time service or a non-real-time service), etc.
  • the wireless access network device can perform data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device according to the received Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the radio access network device may configure a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) mode for the first node according to the data packet size and the data packet cycle to reduce control signaling overhead; or, Exemplarily, the radio access network device may determine the appropriate scheduling start time according to the arrival time of the data packet.
  • SPS semi-persistent scheduling
  • the radio access network device can start a timer according to the survival time, and resend the failed data packet received by the first node to the first node within the survival time.
  • the wireless access network device may send data packets of real-time services with priority and send data packets of non-real-time services with low priority according to the types of services included in the Ethernet packet information; or, exemplary
  • the first node may send the application layer identifier of the first node and the group identifier of the application layer where the first node is located to the radio access network device, and the radio access network device may allocate the cell radio network temporary identity (cell radio network temporary identifier, C-RNTI), and save the correspondence between the application layer identifier of the first node and the C-RNTI.
  • the subsequent core network equipment will send data to multiple nodes in the application layer group to which the first node belongs.
  • the Ethernet packet information can indicate which node in the application layer group the data corresponding to each subheader in the Ethernet frame is sent to (ie the node information corresponding to the subheader), for example, Ethernet
  • the network packet information can be in the sub-header information of the Ethernet frame, and one or more bits are used to indicate the application layer identification of the node corresponding to the sub-header.
  • the wireless access network device After the wireless access network device receives the Ethernet frame, it can be based on the Ethernet packet Information and the application layer identifier of the first node to determine the data to be sent to the first node, and then determine the air interface for sending data to the first node according to the correspondence between the application layer identifier of the first node and the C-RNTI, and transmit the data through the air interface And the corresponding subheader is sent to the first node. It can be understood that, for other nodes in the application layer group except the first node, the radio access network device can also send respective corresponding data to other nodes through this method, which will not be repeated here.
  • the radio access network device can send it to multiple nodes in the application layer group to which the first node belongs, for example, the radio access network
  • the device broadcasts the multicast control channel (multicast control channel, MCCH) or single cell multicast control channel (single cell MCCH, SC-MCCH) configuration information
  • MCCH multicast control channel
  • SC-MCCH single cell multicast control channel
  • the device carries the group identification of the application layer group to which the first node belongs, and then passes it MCCH or SC-MCCH sends the common Ethernet header in the Ethernet frame.
  • the nodes in the application layer group receive the common Ethernet header, they can combine the common Ethernet header, the subheader corresponding to the node, and the data corresponding to the subheader to the application layer for processing.
  • Ethernet packet information in the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters may not be included in the Ethernet protocol layer parameters, but included in the data, for example, may be included between the core network equipment and the wireless access network equipment.
  • the wireless access network device After the wireless access network device receives the data containing the Ethernet packet information, it can delete the padding part according to the Ethernet padding information in the Ethernet packet information, and then send it to the first node Sending the Ethernet frame with the stuffed part deleted is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the radio access network device when the radio access network device is composed of a CU and a DU, after receiving the second message, the CU of the radio access network device may send the Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message to the DU through the F1 interface Then, the DU optimizes the data transmission between the first node and the DU according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the CU of the radio access network device may send the Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message to the DU through the F1 interface.
  • the DU optimizes the data transmission between the first node and the DU according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP
  • the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
  • the first node sends a first message requesting the establishment or modification of the PDU session of the first node to the core network device, and the core network device sends the first message to the radio access network device after receiving the first message
  • the second message for establishing or modifying the PDU session of the first node includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, Data packet cycle, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the embodiment of the application transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node and the wireless access network device based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transfer between.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
  • the radio access network device sends a third message to the first node.
  • the first node receives the third message.
  • the third message includes each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the above one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters It is used for the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data.
  • each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be carried in the NAS message sent by the core network device to the first node.
  • the third message is NAS message from the core network device.
  • the radio access network device can encapsulate the NAS message in an RRC reconfiguration message and forward it to the first node.
  • the first node receiving the third message may be the first node receiving the third message from the core network device through the wireless access network device; or, each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be After the wireless access network device receives one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device, each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters The network protocol layer parameters are encapsulated in a third message and sent to the first node.
  • the first node receiving the third message may be the first node receiving the third message from the radio access network device, and the third message may Reconfiguration message for RRC.
  • the first node may determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter of the generated uplink data.
  • the first node can determine a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters according to the packet size of the uplink data, and the packet size included in the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the data packet of the above data If the size is the same or similar, the QFI corresponding to the group of Ethernet protocol layers is determined as the QFI corresponding to the uplink data.
  • the wireless access network device sends each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the corresponding QFI to the first node, the first node can determine the corresponding uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates. QFI.
  • the wireless access network device when the wireless access network device is composed of CU and DU, after the CU of the wireless access network device receives a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI or multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, it can Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the one or more groups and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters are sent to the DU through the F1 interface, and then sent by the DU to the first node.
  • the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP
  • the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
  • the parameter transmission method may also include: the first radio access network device sends a handover request (handover request) message to the second radio access network device, where the handover request message includes the identifier of the first node, the PDU session identifier of the first node, and the PDU The Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the session identifier; or, the handover request message includes the identifier of the first node, the PDU session identifier of the first node, one or more QFIs, and each of the one or more QFIs corresponds to The Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the second wireless access network device may optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second wireless access network device according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters received from the first wireless access network device.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in this embodiment of the application may also include: the first radio access network device sends a handover required message to the core network device (for example, the MME in the LTE network, or the AMF in the NR network), and the handover required message includes the second handover request message on the core network management device side.
  • the core network device for example, the MME in the LTE network, or the AMF in the NR network
  • a node ID, the first node ID on the first radio access network device side, the second radio access network device ID (or target cell ID), the handover type, the PDU session ID of the first node, and the PDU session of the first node correspond One or more of the one or more QFIs, the DRB identifier corresponding to each QFI in the one or more QFIs, and one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the first radio access network device may include the PDU session identifier of the first node, one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session, one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the first radio access network device to the first node 2.
  • the radio access network device for example, Source to Target Transparent Container.
  • the core network device After the core network device receives the handover request message from the first radio access network device, it sends a handover request (handover request) message to the second access network device.
  • the handover request message includes the handover request message received from the first radio access network device.
  • the above-mentioned information included in the received handover request message may also optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second radio access network device according to the received Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the actions of the first node, radio access network device, or core network device in the foregoing steps S401 to S403 may be executed by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the application program code stored in the memory 503 This embodiment does not impose any restriction on this.
  • the parameter transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 2b.
  • the IIoT server has a data communication requirement between the second node and the first node, and the first node A scenario where an RRC connection is established with the radio access network device (for example, it can be an RRC connection established between the second node's relay and the radio access network device), and the first node has passed the core network authentication
  • the parameter transmission method includes the following steps:
  • the first node sends a first message to the core network device through the second node and the radio access network device.
  • the core network device receives the first message from the first node through the second node and the radio access network device.
  • the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
  • the first message may be a NAS message, such as a PDU session establishment request or a PDU session modification request message.
  • the first node may include the first message in the RRC message, and send the first message using the RRC connection established between the relay of the second node and the radio access network device. After receiving the RRC message containing the first message from the first node, the radio access network device forwards the first message to the core network device.
  • the core network device executes the following step S602 to establish or modify the core network device and the radio access network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node
  • the S1 interface or the user plane tunnel of the NG3 interface corresponding to the PDU session of the first node, where the communication between the core network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node and the radio access network device is modified
  • the data transmission channel can be understood as modifying the QoS flow included in the data transmission channel or modifying the user plane tunnel address.
  • the core network device sends a second message to the radio access network device.
  • the radio access network device receives the second message from the core network device.
  • the second message is used to establish or modify the aforementioned PDU session.
  • the second message includes one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters used to optimize the transmission of the data of the first node between the second node and the radio access network device, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one of the following or Multiple items: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the second message may be a PDU session resource establishment or modification request message.
  • the second message may include the identifier of the PDU session and the user plane tunnel address (for example, the tunnel endpoint identifier or IP address) of the core network device side corresponding to the PDU session.
  • the radio access network device can send a reply message to the core network device.
  • the reply message includes the user plane tunnel address on the radio access network device side. So far, the core network corresponding to the PDU session of the first node The user plane tunnel between the device and the radio access network device is successfully established or modified.
  • the radio access network device can notify the second node to establish or modify the transmission channel between the second node and the radio access network device, and to establish Or modify the transmission channel between the second node and the first node, and the related process can refer to the prior art, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second message also includes one or more QoS flows and corresponding cellular network QoS parameters, wherein each QoS flow is identified by a QFI.
  • Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message may be PDU session granularity or QoS flow granularity.
  • PDU session granularity PDU session granularity
  • QoS flow granularity QoS flow granularity
  • the wireless access network device can optimize the data of the first node according to the received Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the second node and the wireless access network device
  • the method for the wireless access network device to optimize the transmission of the data of the first node between the second node and the wireless access network device is similar to the optimization method in step S402.
  • the radio access network device executes the following step S603 to send relevant Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second Node so that the second node optimizes the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
  • the radio access network device sends the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node.
  • the second node receives the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier from the wireless access network device.
  • the first channel identifier is used to indicate a channel between the first node and the second node.
  • the identifier of the first node may be one or more of the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node, the identifier of the first node in the side link, or the application layer identifier of the first node. Since the second node may be associated with multiple nodes, and each node may have the same channel identifier, the identifier of the first node may be used by the second node to uniquely determine the first channel identifier of the first node.
  • the first node when it requests an association from the second node, it may send the identification of the first node in the side link or the application layer identification of the first node to the second node.
  • the first node may be assigned an identifier, and a reply message may be sent to the first node, and the reply message may carry the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node.
  • the first node sends an RRC connection establishment request to the radio access network device through the relay of the second node, and when the second node forwards the RRC connection establishment request to the radio access network device, it sends the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node
  • the subsequent radio access network device and the second node identify the first node according to the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node; or, if the second node does not assign an identifier to the first node, the second node
  • the node forwards the RRC connection establishment request of the first node to the radio access network device, it sends the identification of the first node in the side link or the application layer identification of the first node to the radio access network device, and subsequent wireless access
  • the network device and the second node identify the first node according to the identification of the first node in the side link or the application layer identification of the first node.
  • the first channel identifier may be a logical channel identifier (LC identifier, LC ID) or a data radio bearer identifier (DRB identifier, DRB ID);
  • the first channel identifier may be a logical channel identifier LC ID or a side link data radio bearer identifier SL DRB ID.
  • the radio access network device may perform DRB mapping on the QoS flow identified by each of the one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session of the first node to determine one or more
  • the first channel identifier is used to determine the corresponding relationship between the QFI and the first channel identifier.
  • the wireless access network device may determine the corresponding relationship between the first channel identifier according to the corresponding relationship between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI and the corresponding relationship between QFI and the first channel identifier The Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the second message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the ID of the PDU session of the first node, each first channel in the first channel ID determined by the radio access network device after DRB mapping
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier are the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier of the PDU session; or, in the case that the second message includes a group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI, wireless access
  • the network device performs DRB mapping, only one first channel identifier is determined, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the first channel identifier is the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to QFI.
  • the wireless access network device determines the first channel identifier according to the correspondence between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI, and the correspondence between QFI and the first channel identifier For the corresponding Ethernet protocol layer parameters, if a first channel identifier corresponds to a QFI, the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the first channel identifier is the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the one QFI; if a first channel If the identifier corresponds to multiple QFIs, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include the Ethernet protocol layer parameters obtained by the wireless access network device integrating the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the multiple QFIs.
  • the content included in the four sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and their respective corresponding QFIs are shown in Table 2.
  • the corresponding relationship between the QFI determined by the radio access network device and the first channel identifier is shown in Table 3.
  • the first channel identifier 1 corresponds to QFI1 and QFI2
  • the wireless access network device integrates the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 and QFI2.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 1 may be as follows:
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to channel ID 1 may include the first group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 or the second group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI2, for example, the first group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 Network protocol layer parameters: data packet size 1, data packet period 1, and receiving window 1; or, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 1 may include the first group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 and corresponding to QFI2
  • the second set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters includes, for example, data packet size 1, data packet period 1, receiving window 1, data packet size 1, and data packet lifetime 1; or, the Ethernet protocol layer corresponding to the first channel identifier
  • the parameters may include some of the first group of parameters corresponding to QFI1 and the second group of parameters corresponding to QFI2, for example, including data packet size 1, data packet period 1, and receiving window 1.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 2 determined by the wireless network device include the third group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI3: packet arrival time 1; the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 3 Including the fourth group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI4: packet cycle 2, Ethernet type 1.
  • the content sent by the wireless access network device to the second node includes the identification of the first node, the first channel identification 1, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identification 1, the first channel identification 2 and the first channel The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier 2, the first channel identifier 3, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 3.
  • Ethernet protocol layer parameters QFI corresponding to Ethernet protocol layer parameters
  • the first group data packet size 1, data packet period 1, receiving window 1 QFI 1
  • the second group data packet size 1, data packet survival time 1 QFI 2
  • the third group data packet arrival time 1 QFI 3
  • the fourth group packet cycle 2, Ethernet type 1 QFI 4
  • the radio access network device may send the identity of the first node, the first channel identity, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identity to the second node through the RRC reconfiguration message, or may send it through other messages
  • the radio access network device may send the identity of the first node, the first channel identity, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identity to the second node through the RRC reconfiguration message, or may send it through other messages
  • the embodiments of this application do not specifically limit this.
  • the second node may use the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier.
  • the network protocol layer parameters optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
  • the second node may determine the size of the Ethernet padding part corresponding to the first channel identifier according to the Ethernet packet information corresponding to the first channel identifier, and subsequently send the first channel to the first node through the first channel indicated by the first channel identifier.
  • the Ethernet padding part can be deleted before sending the data packet; or, as an example, the second node can also compare the parameters between the first node and the second node according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier. Other optimizations are performed for the data transmission between the first node and the second node by the second node.
  • the method for optimizing the data transmission between the first node and the second node is similar to that between the radio access network device and the first node and the radio access network device in step S402. The method of optimizing data transmission between.
  • the core network device can carry the Ethernet padding information of the data packet in the header of the data packet sent to the wireless access network device, for example, in S1 Or carried in the GTP-U of the NG interface.
  • the wireless access network device can carry the Ethernet filling information in the PDCP header of the data packet sent to the second node.
  • the node After the node receives the data packet carrying the Ethernet padding information, it can delete the padding part of the data packet according to the Ethernet padding information, and then send the data packet to the first node.
  • the CU of the radio access network device can establish the corresponding relationship between the QFI and the first channel identifier, and determine each first channel Identify the corresponding Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and then combine the identification of the first node, the one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU of the first node, the first channel identification corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and each The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier are sent to the DU, and the DU sends the identifier of the first node, each first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each first channel identifier to the second Node; or, the CU may also send one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU of the first node, the first channel identifier corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters To the DU, the DU determines the Ethernet
  • the CU may also send one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message to the DU, so that the DU optimizes the transmission of the data of the first node between the second node and the DU.
  • the CU may also send one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message to the DU, so that the DU optimizes the transmission of the data of the first node between the second node and the DU.
  • the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP
  • the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
  • the content sent by the radio access network device to the second node in step S603 may include: the identifier of the first node, one or more corresponding to the PDU session of the first node QFI, the first channel identifier corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs.
  • the second node determines the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier in order to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node; or, the subsequent data generated by the second node needs to be sent to the first node
  • the second node can determine the QFI corresponding to the data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each QFI in one or more QFIs and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the data, and pass the QFI in one or more QFIs
  • the first channel identifier corresponding to each QFI and the QFI corresponding to the data determine the first channel for sending the data to the first node.
  • the content sent by the radio access network device to the second node may also include the cellular network QoS parameters corresponding to each of the one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session of the first node.
  • Layer parameters are understood as IIoT QoS parameters, that is, it can be considered that the radio access network device sends the mapping relationship between the IIoT QoS parameters corresponding to the QFI and the cellular network QoS parameters to the second node.
  • the content sent by the radio access network device to the second node in step S603 may include: The identifier of a node, one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session of the first node, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and each QFI of the one or more QFIs Corresponding cellular network QoS parameters.
  • the second node may perform DRB mapping on each QFI of the one or more QFIs, that is, determine the corresponding relationship between each QFI and the first channel identifier, and send the corresponding relationship to the first node.
  • the second node also sends the cellular network QoS parameter corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs to the first node.
  • the first node sends a first message requesting the establishment or modification of the PDU session of the first node to the core network device, and the core network device sends the first message to the radio access network device after receiving the first message
  • the second message for establishing or modifying the PDU session of the first node.
  • the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the radio access network device After receiving the second message, the radio access network device sends to the second node the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier, where the second message includes a group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or, when the second message includes multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the first channel
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the embodiments of the present application transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can be optimized based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the data of the first node is transmitted between the second node and the wireless access network device; on the other hand, because the wireless access network device sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second node, the second node can also be based on Ethernet
  • the network protocol layer parameters optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
  • the radio access network device may also send a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate the second node
  • the second channel identifier may be a logical channel identifier LC ID or a data radio bearer identifier DRB ID.
  • the CU of the radio access network device may also establish a corresponding relationship between the first channel identifier and the second channel identifier, and then assign the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier.
  • the channel identifier is sent to the DU.
  • the CU may send the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier together with the content sent by the CU to the DU in step S603; or, it may also separately send the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the DU.
  • the content sent by the CU to the DU also includes the identity of the first node.
  • the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP
  • the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
  • the second channel identifiers corresponding to different first channel identifiers may be the same, for example, the first channel identifier 1 and the first channel identifier 2 both correspond to the second channel identifier 1; or the first channel identifiers corresponding to the different first channel identifiers
  • the two channel identifiers may also be different.
  • the first channel identifier 1 corresponds to the second channel identifier 1
  • the first channel identifier 2 corresponds to the second channel identifier 2, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the radio access network device may send the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier together with the content sent to the second node in step S603.
  • the radio access network device sends the second node to the second node.
  • the content includes: the identification of the first node, the first channel identification, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identification, and the second channel identification corresponding to the first channel identification; or, the wireless access network device can also send the first channel separately A second channel identifier corresponding to a channel identifier.
  • the radio access network device also needs to send the identifier of the first node to the second node, so that the second node can determine the first channel identifier that uniquely determines the first node.
  • the radio access network device since the radio access network device sends the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, it can make the second node receive the uplink data of the first node from the second channel, according to the first channel
  • the second channel identifier corresponding to the identifier determines the second channel for sending the uplink data to the radio access network device.
  • the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 6 when the second message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI, or the second message includes multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, as shown in FIG. As shown, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
  • the radio access network device sends a third message to the first node.
  • the first node receives the third message.
  • the third message includes each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the above one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters is used
  • the first node determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data.
  • each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be carried in the NAS message sent by the core network device to the first node.
  • the third message is The NAS message from the core network device.
  • the radio access network device can encapsulate the NAS message in an RRC reconfiguration message and forward it to the second node, and then the first node The two nodes send to the first node.
  • the first node to receive the third message may mean that the first node receives the third message from the core network device through the second node and the radio access network device; or, each group of Ethernets mentioned above
  • the protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be that after the wireless access network device receives one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device, the one or more sets of Ethernet protocol
  • Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the layer parameters are encapsulated in a third message and sent to the first node through the second node.
  • the first node may receive the third message as The first node receives the third message from the radio access network device through the second node, and the third message may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the first node after the first node receives the third message, it can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates. For related description, please refer to the above step S403. Repeat it again.
  • the core network device sends each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node, so that the first node can be based on the Ethernet protocol layer of the uplink data generated by it.
  • the parameter determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data.
  • the actions of the first node, the second node, the radio access network device, or the core network device in the above steps S601 to S604 may be called by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 to call the application stored in the memory 503
  • the program code is executed, and this embodiment does not impose any restriction on this.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 2c. As shown in FIG. 8, the parameter transmission method includes the following steps:
  • the first protocol layer entity of the first node obtains Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node. For the meaning of each of the above items, refer to the related description in the above step S401, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first protocol layer entity may be an application layer entity or an Ethernet protocol layer entity.
  • the first protocol layer entity of the first node sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
  • the obtained Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node so that the second protocol layer entity Optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
  • the second protocol layer entity may be a radio link control (RLC) layer entity, a media access control (media access control, MAC) layer entity, or a physical (physics, PHY) layer entity.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • the second protocol layer entity of the first node may perform transmission optimization according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the MAC layer entity of the first node may generate a corresponding scheduling policy according to the data packet size and the data packet cycle, for example, configure the semi-static scheduling SPS mode for the second node, Or, for example, the MAC layer entity of the first node may prepare corresponding transmission resources according to the size of the data packet.
  • the RLC layer entity of the first node may segment the data according to the ethernet padding information in the Ethernet packet information, for example, the Ethernet The net frame is divided into a part containing data and a part containing padding, and the part containing padding is deleted before sending the Ethernet frame to the second node.
  • the RLC layer entity of the first node may also determine the transmission block size (TBS) of the data packet to be sent according to the size of the data packet, and send the TBS of the data packet to be sent to the MAC layer entity of the first node, So that the MAC layer entity of the first node prepares corresponding transmission resources.
  • TBS transmission block size
  • the parameter transmission method provided by the embodiments of the present application can transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters between different protocol layers in a node; on the other hand, compared to the prior art, the MAC layer entity of the first node According to channel conditions, the number of resource blocks, etc., determine the TBS of the data packet to be sent to prepare the corresponding transmission resources, and the MAC layer entity informs the RLC layer entity of the TBS of the data packet to be sent, so that the RLC layer entity performs the process of grouping packets according to the TBS.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application can reduce the complexity of the first node transmission optimization.
  • the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 may further include: the first node obtains the subnet topology information of the second node, where the subnet of the second node indicates that the second node is connected to other IOT devices
  • the subnet topology information is used by the first protocol layer entity of the first node to determine the format of the data sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
  • the first node acquiring the subnet topology information of the second node may be: the first node receives the subnet topology information from the second node.
  • the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 may further include:
  • the second node sends the subnet topology information to the first node.
  • the first node receives the subnet topology information from the second node.
  • the subnet topology information can indicate whether the second node carries a subnet. For example, a value of 1 for the bit carrying the subnet topology information indicates that the second node carries the subnet, that is, the second node is connected to other IOT devices, and A value of 0 means that the second node does not carry a subnet, that is, the second node is not connected to other IOT devices; or, the subnet topology information can also indicate the topology of the subnet carried by the second node, for example, indicate the topology of the subnet It is a star, line, or ring; or, the subnet topology information may also indicate that the subnet carried by the second node is a wired subnet or a wireless subnet. It is understandable that the subnet topology information may also indicate other information of the subnet carried by the second node, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application may further include: the first node sends a request message to the second node to request the second node to report its subnet topology information.
  • the second node After receiving the request message from the first node, the second node sends the subnet topology information to the first node; alternatively, the second node may also report its subnet topology information to the first node periodically, in this embodiment of the application There is no specific restriction on this.
  • the first node after the first node obtains the subnet topology information of the second node, it can perform transmission optimization according to the subnet topology information, for example, determine the first protocol layer of the first node according to the subnet topology information of the second node The format of the data sent by the entity to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
  • the first protocol layer entity of the first node may The user's data is combined into an EtherCAT data packet and sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
  • the first node may also determine the manner of sending data to nodes in the subnet carried by the second node according to the subnet topology information of the second node, for example, if the subnet topology information indicates the subnet structure carried by the second node In a star structure, the first node sends the data contained in the EtherCAT packet header through MCCH or SC-MCCH multicast, and the data of different nodes contained in the EtherCAT packet through a dedicated control channel (Dedicated Control Channel, DCCH )send separately.
  • a dedicated control channel Dedicated Control Channel, DCCH
  • the first node when the first node is connected to multiple second nodes, and the first node and multiple second nodes communicate via EtherCAT, the first node can also send the data contained in the EtherCAT packet header via MCCH or SC-MCCH multicast , And the data of different nodes contained in the EtherCAT packet are sent separately through the DCCH.
  • the first node can optimize the first node's network topology information based on the second node's subnet topology information
  • the data transmission between the first protocol layer and the second protocol layer or the data transmission between the first node and the second node can improve the optimization performance of the first node.
  • step S803 there is no strict sequence between step S803 and step S801.
  • Step S801 can be performed first, and then step S803; or, step S803 can be performed first, and then step S801; or, step S801 and step S801 can be performed simultaneously.
  • Step S803, this embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this.
  • the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9 may further include: the first node obtains the first protocol layer identifier of the second node.
  • the first node acquiring the first protocol layer identifier of the second node may be: the first node receives the first protocol layer identifier of the second node from the second node.
  • the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9 may further include:
  • the second node sends the first protocol layer identifier of the second node to the first node.
  • the first node receives the first protocol layer identifier of the second node.
  • the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application may further include: the first node sends a request message to the second node, requesting the second node to report its first protocol layer identifier.
  • the second node After receiving the request message, the second node sends its first protocol layer identifier to the first node; alternatively, the second node may report its first protocol layer identifier to the first node when requesting association from the second node.
  • This application does not specifically limit this.
  • the first node determines and saves the first protocol layer identifier of the second node and The corresponding relationship between the Uu port identifier (ie C-RNTI); if the first node is deployed in the terminal device, the first node determines and saves the first protocol layer identifier of the second node and the side link SL port identifier (ie, near Field communication user equipment identifier (Proximity service enable user equipment identifier, ProSe UE ID)).
  • the Uu port identifier ie C-RNTI
  • the first node determines and saves the first protocol layer identifier of the second node and the side link SL port identifier (ie, near Field communication user equipment identifier (Proximity service enable user equipment identifier, ProSe UE ID)).
  • the first protocol layer of the first node can notify the first node to which node the data corresponding to each subheader in the second protocol layer Ethernet frame should be sent, so that the first The second protocol layer of the node determines the data sent to the second node.
  • the first node can determine the corresponding relationship between the first protocol layer identifier of the second node and the interface identifier (Uu port identifier or SL port identifier), and the second The first protocol layer identifier of the node determines the interface identifier for sending data to the second node, so that the data is sent to the second node through the interface indicated by the interface identifier.
  • the first protocol layer identifier of the second node is the first protocol layer identifier 1, as an example, the first protocol layer identifier of the second node saved by the first node
  • the corresponding relationship with the Uu port identifier can be: the first protocol layer identifier 1: C-RNTI 1; after the second protocol layer in the subsequent section 1 determines the data sent to the second node, the corresponding relationship can determine the second node
  • the interface identifier for the node sending data is C-RNTI 1, and the data is sent to the second node through the interface indicated by C-RNTI 1.
  • the second node needs to fill in the Ethernet frame to 64 bytes after receiving the data from the first node, and then add The data packet is sent to other nodes in the subnet.
  • the first node can also optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node according to the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, thereby improving the optimization performance of the first node.
  • step S804 there is no strict sequence between step S804 and step S801.
  • Step S801 can be performed first, and then step S804; alternatively, step S804 can be performed first, and then step S801; or, step S801 and step S801 can be performed simultaneously.
  • Step S804 this embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this.
  • the actions of the first node or the second node in the above steps S801 to S804 may be executed by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the application program code stored in the memory 503, and this embodiment There are no restrictions.
  • the methods and/or steps implemented by the first node can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the first node, and methods implemented by wireless access network equipment And/or steps can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in wireless access network devices, and methods and/or steps implemented by core network devices can also be implemented by components (such as chips) that can be used in core network devices. Or circuit) implementation.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which is used to implement the foregoing various methods.
  • the communication device may be the first node in the foregoing method embodiment, or a device including the foregoing first node, or a component that can be used for the first node; or, the communication device may be the wireless access in the foregoing method embodiment Network equipment, or a device including the above-mentioned wireless access network equipment, or a component that can be used in an access network; or, the communication device may be the core network equipment in the foregoing method embodiment, or a device including the above-mentioned core network equipment, Or a component that can be used in core network equipment.
  • the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiments of the present application may divide the communication device into functional modules according to the foregoing method embodiments.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of a wireless access network device 110.
  • the wireless access network device 110 includes a receiving module 1101 and a sending module 1102.
  • the receiving module 1101 may also be called a receiving unit to implement a receiving function, for example, it may be a receiving circuit, a receiver, a receiver or a communication interface;
  • the sending module 1102 may also be called a sending unit to implement a sending function, For example, it can be a transmitting circuit, a transmitter, a transmitter, or a communication interface.
  • the receiving module 1101 is configured to receive a first message from the first node, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
  • the sending module 1102 is configured to send the first message to the core network device.
  • the receiving module 1101 is further configured to receive a second message from the core network device.
  • the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session.
  • the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the network protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Wherein, the Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device.
  • the sending module 1102 is further configured to send the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the first channel identifier is used to indicate A channel between the first node and the second node, the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the first channel identifier includes the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or the Ethernet protocol corresponding to the first channel identifier
  • the layer parameters include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the first node is connected to the radio access network device through the second node.
  • the sending module 1102 is further configured to send a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate the communication between the second node and the radio access network device Of one channel.
  • the radio access network device 110 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • the "module” here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions.
  • the wireless access network device 110 may adopt the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503 to make the wireless access network device 110 execute the parameter transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the function/implementation process of the receiving module 1101 and the sending module 1102 in FIG. 11 can be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503.
  • the functions/implementation process of the receiving module 1101 and the sending module 1102 in FIG. 11 may be implemented through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the radio access network device 110 provided in this embodiment can perform the above-mentioned parameter transmission method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a core network device 120.
  • the core network device 120 includes a receiving module 1201 and a sending module 1202.
  • the receiving module 1201 may also be called a receiving unit to realize the receiving function, for example, it may be a receiving circuit, a receiver, a receiver or a communication interface;
  • the sending module 1202 may also be called a sending unit to realize the sending function, For example, it can be a transmitting circuit, a transmitter, a transmitter, or a communication interface.
  • the receiving module 1201 is configured to receive a first message from a first node, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
  • the sending module 1202 is configured to send a second message to the wireless access network device.
  • the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session.
  • the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Wherein, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device.
  • the sending module 1202 is further configured to send multiple groups or each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in a group corresponding to QFI and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node.
  • the QFI corresponding to the group Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used by the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter of the uplink data.
  • the core network device 120 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • the "module” here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions.
  • the core network device 120 may take the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503 to enable the core network device 120 to execute the parameter transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the function/implementation process of the receiving module 1201 and the sending module 1202 in FIG. 12 may be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503.
  • the functions/implementation process of the receiving module 1201 and the sending module 1202 in FIG. 12 may be implemented through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the core network device 120 provided in this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned parameter transmission method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a first node 130.
  • the first node 130 includes a receiving module 1301 and a sending module 1302.
  • the receiving module 1301 may also be called a receiving unit to realize the receiving function, for example, it may be a receiving circuit, a receiver, a receiver or a communication interface;
  • the sending module 1302 may also be called a sending unit to realize the sending function, For example, it can be a transmitting circuit, a transmitter, a transmitter, or a communication interface.
  • the sending module 1302 is configured to send a first message to the core network device, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or request a PDU session of the first node.
  • the receiving module 1301 is used to receive multiple groups or a group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI from the core network device for each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the QFI corresponding to the group Ethernet protocol layer parameters is used by the communication device to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data.
  • the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data Packet cycle, data packet arrival time, data packet lifetime, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  • the first node 130 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • the "module” here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions.
  • the first node 130 may take the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503, so that the first node 130 executes the parameter transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the function/implementation process of the receiving module 1301 and the sending module 1302 in FIG. 13 can be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503.
  • the functions/implementation process of the receiving module 1301 and the sending module 1302 in FIG. 13 may be implemented through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the technical effect that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic structural diagram of another first node 140.
  • the first node 140 includes a processing module 1401 and a transceiver module 1402.
  • the transceiver module 1402 may also be called a transceiver unit to implement sending and/or receiving functions, for example, it may be a transceiver circuit, transceiver, transceiver or communication interface.
  • the processing module 1401 is used for the first protocol layer entity of the first node to obtain Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
  • the transceiver module 1402 is used for the first protocol layer entity of the first node to send the Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size , Data packet cycle, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node .
  • the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain subnet topology information of the second node, where the subnet topology information is used by the first protocol layer entity of the first node to determine the second protocol layer of the first node The format of the data sent by the entity.
  • processing module 1401 is further configured to send a request message to the second node through the transceiver module 1402 to request the second node to report its subnet topology information.
  • the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain subnet topology information of the second node, and includes: a processing module 1401, configured to receive the subnet topology information from the second node through the transceiver module 1402.
  • the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, where the first protocol layer identifier of the second node is used to determine the interface identifier corresponding to the data sent to the second node.
  • processing module 1401 is further configured to send a request message to the second node through the transceiver module 1402 to request the second node to report its first protocol layer identifier.
  • the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, and includes: a processing module 1401 configured to receive the first protocol layer identifier from the second node through the transceiver module 1402.
  • the first node 140 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • the "module” here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions.
  • the first node 140 may take the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503, so that the first node 140 executes the data transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the functions/implementation process of the processing module 1401 and the transceiver module 1402 in FIG. 14 may be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1401 in FIG. 14 can be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503, /The realization process can be realized through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the first node 140 provided in this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned parameter transmission method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system), and the communication device includes a processor for implementing the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the memory is used to store necessary program instructions and data, and the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the memory may not be in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or includes one or more data storage devices such as servers, data centers, etc. that can be integrated with the medium.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the computer may include the aforementioned device.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in embodiments of the present application are a method, apparatus, and system for transmitting parameters. Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be transmitted in a process of establishing or modifying a PDU session so that a wireless access network device optimizes transmission on the basis of the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. In the method, a first node sends to a core network device a first message for requesting that the core network device establish or modify a PDU session of the first node. The core network device receives the first message and sends to the wireless access network device a second message for establishing or modifying the PDU session. The second message comprises one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters comprise one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet lifetime, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. The Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device.

Description

参数传输方法、装置及系统Parameter transmission method, device and system
本申请要求于2019年06月24日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201910551590.X、申请名称为“参数传输方法、装置及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on June 24, 2019, the application number is 201910551590.X, and the application name is "parameter transmission method, device and system", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference In this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,尤其涉及参数传输方法、装置及系统。This application relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a parameter transmission method, device and system.
背景技术Background technique
如图1所示,作为目前研究热点的工业物联网(industry internet of things,IIoT)中主要包括:线路控制器(line controller)、机器控制器(machine controller)、以及设备(例如传感器(sensor),执行器(actuator),进出设备(I/O box)等)共三类节点(以下称为IIOT节点)。此外,IIoT中主要包括:线路控制器和机器控制器之间的通信(controller to controller-1,C-2-C-1)、机器控制器和机器控制器之间的通信(C-2-C-2)、机器控制器和设备之间的通信(controller to device,C-2-D)、以及设备间的通信(device to device,D-2-D)共四种类型的通信。As shown in Figure 1, the industrial Internet of Things (IIoT), which is currently a research hotspot, mainly includes: line controllers, machine controllers, and equipment (such as sensors) There are three types of nodes (actuator, I/O box, etc.) (hereinafter referred to as IIoT nodes). In addition, IIoT mainly includes: the communication between the line controller and the machine controller (controller to controller-1, C-2-C-1), the communication between the machine controller and the machine controller (C-2- C-2), communication between the machine controller and the device (controller to device, C-2-D), and communication between the devices (device to device, D-2-D) are four types of communication.
其中,传统的IIOT中不同的IIoT节点通过有线连接,而IIOT无线化后,不同IIoT节点之间可以基于无线网络架构通过以太网(ethernet)协议通信。例如,位于核心网的线路控制器通过核心网设备以及基站与机器控制器通信。同时,在IIOT无线化后,很多以太网协议层参数可以用于优化底层传输,减少传输开销,从而实现跨层优化。例如,核心网设备可以向基站发送消息周期、消息大小、消息到达时间来优化时间敏感网络(time sensitive network,TSN)业务的数据传输。然而,IIOT无线化后,如何传输以太网协议层参数,目前并没有相关的解决方案。Among them, different IIoT nodes in the traditional IIoT are connected by wires, and after the IIoT is wireless, different IIoT nodes can communicate through the Ethernet (ethernet) protocol based on the wireless network architecture. For example, the line controller located in the core network communicates with the machine controller through core network equipment and base stations. At the same time, after IIoT becomes wireless, many Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be used to optimize the underlying transmission and reduce the transmission overhead, thereby achieving cross-layer optimization. For example, the core network device may send the message cycle, message size, and message arrival time to the base station to optimize the data transmission of the time sensitive network (TSN) service. However, there is no relevant solution for how to transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters after IIoT becomes wireless.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种参数传输方法、装置、系统,可以在建立PDU会话的过程中传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化数据传输,并提高无线接入网设备的优化性能。The embodiments of the application provide a parameter transmission method, device, and system, which can transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters during the establishment of a PDU session, so that wireless access network equipment can optimize data transmission based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and improve Optimized performance of wireless access network equipment.
为达到上述目的,本申请的实施例采用如下技术方案:In order to achieve the foregoing objectives, the embodiments of the present application adopt the following technical solutions:
第一方面,提供了一种参数传输方法及相应的装置。该方案中,无线接入网设备接收来自第一节点的第一消息,并向核心网设备发送该第一消息,其中,该第一消息用于向核心网设备请求建立或修改第一节点的协议数据单元PDU会话。无线接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第二消息,该第二消息用于建立或修改该PDU会话,该第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息;其中,该以太网协议层参数用于优化该第一节点和无线接入网设备的数据传输。基于该方案,由于核心网设备在建立或修改PDU会话的过程中,向无线接入网设备传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的数据传输。In the first aspect, a parameter transmission method and corresponding device are provided. In this solution, the radio access network device receives the first message from the first node, and sends the first message to the core network device, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the Protocol data unit PDU session. The radio access network device receives a second message from the core network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters Including one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; among them, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used for optimization Data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device. Based on this solution, the core network device transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the process of establishing or modifying the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node and the wireless access network device based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transmission between wireless access network devices.
在一种可能的设计中,第二消息包括上述PDU会话的标识,该一组以太网协议层参数对应上述PDU会话的标识。In a possible design, the second message includes the identifier of the foregoing PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the foregoing PDU session.
在一种可能的设计中,第二消息包括一个服务质量流标识QFI,该一组以太网协议层参数对应该一个QFI;或者,第二消息包括多个QFI,上述多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数分别对应该多个QFI中的每个QFI。In a possible design, the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to one QFI; or, the second message includes multiple QFIs, and the foregoing multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in corresponds to each of the multiple QFIs.
在一种可能的设计中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还包括:无线接入网设备向第二节点发送上述第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,该第一通道标识用于指示第一节点与第二节点之间的一个通道,该第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括该一组以太网协议层参数,或者,该第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括该多组以太网协议层参数中部分或全部参数,该第一节点通过该第二节点连接到该无线接入网设备。基于该方案,一方面,本申请实施例在PDU会话建立或修改过程中向无线接入网设备传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点的数据在第二节点和无线接入网设备之间的传输;另一方面,由于接入网设备还向第二节点发送以太网协议层参数,从而使第二节点也可以基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输。In a possible design, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the radio access network device sends the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node. Network protocol layer parameters, the first channel identifier is used to indicate a channel between the first node and the second node, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or, The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the first node is connected to the radio access network device through the second node. Based on this solution, on the one hand, the embodiment of the application transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters The data is transmitted between the second node and the wireless access network device; on the other hand, because the access network device also sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second node, the second node can also be based on the Ethernet protocol layer The parameters optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
在一种可能的设计中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还包括:无线接入网设备向上述第二节点发送第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,该第二通道标识用于指示该第二节点与上述无线接入网设备之间的一个通道。基于该方案,由于无线接入网设备向第二节点发送第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,因此可以使第二节点从第一节点的第一通道接收到上行数据后,确定向无线接入网设备发送该上行数据的第二通道。In a possible design, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the radio access network device sends a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate A channel between the second node and the above-mentioned wireless access network device. Based on this solution, since the wireless access network device sends the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, the second node can determine to connect to the wireless connection after receiving uplink data from the first channel of the first node. The second channel through which the network access device sends the uplink data.
在一种可能的设计中,上述第一通道标识为逻辑信道标识、数据无线承载标识、或者侧行链路数据无线承载标识。In a possible design, the foregoing first channel identifier is a logical channel identifier, a data radio bearer identifier, or a side link data radio bearer identifier.
在一种可能的设计中,上述第二通道标识为逻辑信道标识、或者数据无线承载标识。In a possible design, the foregoing second channel identifier is a logical channel identifier or a data radio bearer identifier.
在一种可能的设计中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法,还包括:无线接入网设备向第一节点发送第三消息,该第三消息包括一组以太网协议层参数以及该一组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI或包括多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定该上行数据对应的QFI。基于该方案,由于无线接入网设备将上述以太网协议层参数对应的QFI发送给第一节点,从而可以使第一节点根据其生成的上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定上行数据对应的QFI。In a possible design, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the radio access network device sends a third message to the first node, and the third message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the one The QFI corresponding to the group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters or each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in multiple groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters is used for The first node determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data. Based on this solution, the wireless access network device sends the QFI corresponding to the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node, so that the first node can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates. .
第二方面,提供了一种参数传输方法和相应的装置。该方案中,核心网设备接收来自第一节点的第一消息,该第一消息用于向该核心网设备请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话。该核心网设备向无线接入网设备发送第二消息,该第二消息用于建立或修改该PDU会话,该第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息;其中,该以太网协议层参数用于优化第一节点和无线接入网设备的数据传输。其中,第二方面所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In the second aspect, a parameter transmission method and corresponding device are provided. In this solution, the core network device receives a first message from the first node, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node. The core network device sends a second message to the radio access network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, and the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters Including one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; among them, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used for optimization Data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device. Among them, the technical effects brought about by the second aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought about by the above-mentioned first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的设计中,第二消息包括所述PDU会话的标识,该一组以太网协议层参数对应所述PDU会话的标识。In a possible design, the second message includes the identifier of the PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the PDU session.
在一种可能的设计中,第二消息包括一个服务质量流标识QFI,该一组以太网协议层参数对应该一个QFI;或者,第二消息包括多个QFI,上述多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数分别对应该多个QFI中的每个QFI。In a possible design, the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to one QFI; or, the second message includes multiple QFIs, and the foregoing multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in corresponds to each of the multiple QFIs.
在一种可能的设计中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还包括:该核心网设备向该第一节点发送一组以太网协议层参数以及该一组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI或多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,以太网协议参数对应的QFI用于该第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定该上行数据对应的QFI。基于该方案,由于核心网设备将以太网协议层参数对应的QFI发送给第一节点,从而可以使第一节点根据其生成的上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定上行数据对应的QFI。In a possible design, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the core network device sends a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI or QFI corresponding to the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node. Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the multiple groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol parameters is used for the Ethernet protocol layer of the first node according to the uplink data The parameter determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data. Based on this solution, since the core network device sends the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter to the first node, the first node can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates.
第三方面,提供了一种参数传输方法和相应的装置。该方案中,第一节点向核心网设备发送第一消息,该第一消息用于向该核心网设备请求建立或修改该第一节点的协议数据单元PDU会话。第一节点接收来自该核心网设备的一组或多组以太网协议层参数中每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定该上行数据对应的QFI,其中,该一组以太网协议层参数与QFI对应,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。基于该方案,由于核心网设备将每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI发送给第一节点,从而可以使第一节点根据其生成的上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定上行数据对应的QFI。In the third aspect, a parameter transmission method and corresponding device are provided. In this solution, the first node sends a first message to the core network device, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the protocol data unit PDU session of the first node. The first node receives the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device. QFI is used by the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data, where the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to QFI, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following : Data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Based on this solution, since the core network device sends the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node, the first node can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates.
第四方面,提供了一种参数传输方法和相应的装置。该方案中,第一节点的第一协议层实体获取以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。该第一节点的第一协议层实体向该第一节点的第二协议层实体发送该以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数用于优化该第一节点与第二节点之间的数据传输。基于该方案,由于第一节点的第一协议层实体可以将以太网协议层参数发送给第一节点的第二协议层实体,第一节点的第二协议层实体可以直接利用该以太网协议层参数进行优化。因此,一方面,可以在第一节点内的不同协议层之间传输以太网协议层参数;另一方面,第一节点可以直接获取以太网协议层参数,从而可以降低第一节点传输优化的复杂度。In the fourth aspect, a parameter transmission method and corresponding device are provided. In this solution, the first protocol layer entity of the first node obtains Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival Time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. The first protocol layer entity of the first node sends the Ethernet protocol layer parameter to the second protocol layer entity of the first node, where the Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used to optimize data between the first node and the second node transmission. Based on this solution, since the first protocol layer entity of the first node can send Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node, the second protocol layer entity of the first node can directly use the Ethernet protocol layer Parameters are optimized. Therefore, on the one hand, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be transmitted between different protocol layers in the first node; on the other hand, the first node can directly obtain the Ethernet protocol layer parameters, which can reduce the complexity of the first node transmission optimization degree.
在一种可能的设计中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还包括:该第一节点获取该第二节点的子网拓扑信息,该子网拓扑信息用于该第一节点的第一协议层实体确定向该第一节点的第二协议层实体发送的数据的格式。基于该方案,第一节点还可以根据第二节点上报的子网拓扑信息进行传输优化,从而可以提高第一节点的优化性能。In a possible design, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the first node obtains subnet topology information of the second node, and the subnet topology information is used for the first protocol of the first node The layer entity determines the format of the data sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node. Based on this solution, the first node can also perform transmission optimization according to the subnet topology information reported by the second node, so that the optimization performance of the first node can be improved.
在一种可能的设计中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还包括:该第一节点获取该第二节点的第一协议层标识,该第二节点的第一协议层标识用于确定向该第二节点发送的数据对应的接口标识。基于该方案,第一节点还可以根据第二节点上报的第二节点的第一协议层标识进行传输优化,从而可以提高第一节点的优化性能。In a possible design, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the first node obtains the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, and the first protocol layer identifier of the second node is used to determine the direction The interface identifier corresponding to the data sent by the second node. Based on this solution, the first node can also perform transmission optimization according to the first protocol layer identifier of the second node reported by the second node, so that the optimization performance of the first node can be improved.
在一种可能的设计中,上述第一协议层实体包括应用层实体或者以太网协议层实体。In a possible design, the foregoing first protocol layer entity includes an application layer entity or an Ethernet protocol layer entity.
在一种可能的设计中,上述第二协议层实体包括以下一种或多种:无线链路控制RLC层实体、媒体接入控制MAC层实体、或者物理PHY层实体。In a possible design, the foregoing second protocol layer entity includes one or more of the following: a radio link control RLC layer entity, a medium access control MAC layer entity, or a physical PHY layer entity.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的无线接入网设备,或者包含上述无线接入网设备的装置,或者上述无线接入网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的核心网设备,或者包含上述核心网设备的装置,或者上述核心网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面或第四方面中的第一节点,或者包含上述第一节点的装置,或者上述第一节点中包含的装置。所述通信装置包括实现上述方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means 可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided for implementing the above-mentioned various methods. The communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above. The core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node. The communication device includes a module, unit, or means corresponding to the foregoing method, and the module, unit, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or hardware execution of corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机指令,当该处理器执行该指令时,以使该通信装置执行上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的无线接入网设备,或者包含上述无线接入网设备的装置,或者上述无线接入网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的核心网设备,或者包含上述核心网设备的装置,或者上述核心网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面或第四方面中的第一节点,或者包含上述第一节点的装置,或者上述第一节点中包含的装置。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any of the above aspects. The communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above. The core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器;所述处理器用于与存储器耦合,并读取存储器中的指令之后,根据所述指令执行如上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的无线接入网设备,或者包含上述无线接入网设备的装置,或者上述无线接入网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的核心网设备,或者包含上述核心网设备的装置,或者上述核心网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面或第四方面中的第一节点,或者包含上述第一节点的装置,或者上述第一节点中包含的装置。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, including: a processor; the processor is configured to couple with a memory, and after reading an instruction in the memory, execute the method according to any of the foregoing aspects according to the instruction. The communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above. The core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得计算机可以执行上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的无线接入网设备,或者包含上述无线接入网设备的装置,或者上述无线接入网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的核心网设备,或者包含上述核心网设备的装置,或者上述核心网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面或第四方面中的第一节点,或者包含上述第一节点的装置,或者上述第一节点中包含的装置。In an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. The computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a communication device, enable a computer to execute the method described in any of the above aspects. The communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above. The core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
第九方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得计算机可以执行上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的无线接入网设备,或者包含上述无线接入网设备的装置,或者上述无线接入网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的核心网设备,或者包含上述核心网设备的装置,或者上述核心网设备中包含的装置;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面或第四方面中的第一节点,或者包含上述第一节点的装置,或者上述第一节点中包含的装置。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which when running on a communication device, enables a computer to execute the method described in any of the above aspects. The communication device may be the radio access network device in the first aspect mentioned above, or the device including the radio access network device mentioned above, or the device included in the radio access network device mentioned above; or, the communication device may be the second device mentioned above. The core network device in the aspect, or the device including the above core network device, or the device included in the above core network device; or, the communication device may be the first node in the third aspect or the fourth aspect, or include the above The device of the first node, or the device included in the above-mentioned first node.
第十方面,提供了一种通信装置(例如,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统),该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方面中所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置还包括存储器,该存储器,用于保存必要的程序指令和数据。该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a tenth aspect, a communication device is provided (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system), and the communication device includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in any of the above aspects. In a possible design, the communication device further includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data. When the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
其中,第五方面至第十方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或第四方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought about by any of the design methods of the fifth aspect to the tenth aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the first aspect or the second aspect or the third aspect or the fourth aspect. I won't repeat them here.
第十一方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第一方面所述的无线接入网设备和上述第二方面所述的核心网设备。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes the radio access network device described in the first aspect and the core network device described in the second aspect.
第十二方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第一方面和第四方面所述的第二节点、上述第一方面所述的无线接入网设备和上述第二方面所述的核心网设备。In a twelfth aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes the second node described in the first and fourth aspects, the radio access network device described in the first aspect, and the radio access network device described in the second aspect. Core network equipment.
第十三方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第一方面所述的无线接入网设备、上述第二方面所述的核心网设备和上述第三方面所述的第一节点。In a thirteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes the radio access network device described in the first aspect, the core network device described in the second aspect, and the first node described in the third aspect.
第十四方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第一方面和第四方面所述的第二节点、上述第一方面所述的无线接入网设备、上述第二方面所述的核心网设备和上述第三方面所述的第一节点。In a fourteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes the second node described in the first and fourth aspects, the radio access network device described in the first aspect, and the communication system described in the second aspect. The core network device and the first node described in the third aspect.
第十五方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第一方面和第四方面所述的第二节点和上述第四方面所述的第一节点。In a fifteenth aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes the second node described in the first and fourth aspects and the first node described in the fourth aspect.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为现有的一种工业物联网的结构示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an existing industrial Internet of Things structure;
图2a为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图;2a is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图2b为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的结构示意图;2b is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图2c为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信系统的结构示意图;2c is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种参数传输方法的流程示意图一;FIG. 4 is a first schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种参数传输方法的流程示意图二;FIG. 5 is a second schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种参数传输方法的流程示意图三;FIG. 6 is a third schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种参数传输方法的流程示意图四;FIG. 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种参数传输方法的流程示意图五;FIG. 8 is a fifth schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种参数传输方法的流程示意图六;FIG. 9 is a sixth flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种参数传输方法的流程示意图七;FIG. 10 is a seventh schematic flowchart of a parameter transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种无线接入网设备的结构示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless access network device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种核心网设备的结构示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a core network device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种第一节点的结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a first node provided by an embodiment of this application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的另一种第一节点的结构示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another first node provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。并且,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Wherein, in the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means that the objects associated before and after are in an "or" relationship, for example, A/B can mean A or B; in this application, "and/or "It's just an association relationship that describes the associated objects. It means that there can be three kinds of relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. , B can be singular or plural. Also, in the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more than two. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or plural items (a). For example, at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple . In addition, in order to facilitate a clear description of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with substantially the same function and effect. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity and order of execution, and words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the difference.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统。例如:正交频分多址(orthogonal frequency-division multiple access,OFDMA)、单载波频分多址(single carrier FDMA,SC-FDMA)、第五代(5thgeneration,5G)通信系统和其它系统等。术语“系统”可以和“网络”相互替换。OFDMA系统可以实现诸如演进通用无线陆地接入(evolved universal terrestrial radio access,E-UTRA)、超级移动宽带(ultra mobile broadband,UMB)等无线技术。E-UTRA是通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunications system,UMTS)演进版本。第三 代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)在长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)和基于LTE演进的各种版本是使用E-UTRA的新版本。5G通信系统是正在研究当中的下一代通信系统。其中,5G通信系统包括非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)的5G移动通信系统,独立组网(standalone,SA)的5G移动通信系统,或者,NSA的5G移动通信系统和SA的5G移动通信系统。此外,通信系统还可以适用于面向未来的通信技术,都适用本申请实施例提供的技术方案。上述适用本申请的通信系统仅是举例说明,适用本申请的通信系统不限于此,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems. For example: orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA), single-carrier frequency-division multiple access (single carrier FDMA, SC-FDMA), the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system and other systems. The term "system" can be replaced with "network". The OFDMA system can implement wireless technologies such as evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) and ultra mobile broadband (UMB). E-UTRA is an evolved version of the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS). The 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) uses the new version of E-UTRA in long term evolution (LTE) and various versions based on LTE evolution. The 5G communication system is the next generation communication system under study. Among them, 5G communication systems include non-standalone (NSA) 5G mobile communication systems, standalone (SA) 5G mobile communication systems, or NSA’s 5G mobile communication systems and SA’s 5G mobile communication systems. Communication Systems. In addition, the communication system may also be applicable to future-oriented communication technologies, all of which are applicable to the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application. The above-mentioned communication system applicable to the present application is only an example, and the communication system applicable to the present application is not limited to this, and the description is unified here, and the details are not repeated below.
如图2a所示,为本申请提供的一种通信系统10a。该通信系统10a包括第一节点20,无线接入网设备30,以及核心网设备40,该核心网设备40连接IIoT服务器。As shown in Fig. 2a, a communication system 10a provided for this application. The communication system 10a includes a first node 20, a wireless access network device 30, and a core network device 40, and the core network device 40 is connected to an IIoT server.
其中,本申请实施例中的IIOT服务器也可以称之为IIOT控制器,其可以包括机器控制器或者线路控制器,在此统一说明,该说明适用于本申请所有实施例,以下不再赘述。Among them, the IIoT server in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as an IIoT controller, which may include a machine controller or a line controller, which is uniformly described here, and the description is applicable to all the embodiments of the present application, and will not be repeated below.
其中,第一节点20向核心网设备40发送第一消息,该第一消息用于向核心网设备40请求建立或修改第一节点20的协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话,核心网设备40接收第一消息后,向无线接入网设备30发送第二消息,第二消息用于建立或修改第一节点20的PDU会话。在该第二消息中包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。其中,上述以太网协议层参数用于优化第一节点20和无线接入网设备30之间的数据传输。基于该方案,核心网设备在建立或修改PDU会话的过程中,向无线接入网设备传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点20和无线接入网设备30之间的数据传输。The first node 20 sends a first message to the core network device 40, and the first message is used to request the core network device 40 to establish or modify a protocol data unit (PDU) session of the first node 20, and the core network device 40 After receiving the first message, the device 40 sends a second message to the radio access network device 30. The second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node 20. The second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, Receive window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Among them, the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node 20 and the wireless access network device 30. Based on this solution, the core network device transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the process of establishing or modifying the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node 20 and the first node 20 based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transmission between wireless access network devices 30.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法仅涉及PDU会话建立或修改流程中的部分步骤,关于PDU会话建立或修改流程的其他步骤可参考现有技术,在此统一说明,下述实施例不再赘述。It should be noted that the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiments of the present application only involves some steps in the PDU session establishment or modification process. For other steps in the PDU session establishment or modification process, reference may be made to the prior art, which is explained here in a unified manner. The embodiments will not be repeated.
可选的,该通信系统10a中的第一节点20,是一种IIoT节点,可以是工业物联网中的设备,如传感器(sensor),执行器(actuator),进出设备(I/O box)等;或者,也可以是工业物联网中的机器控制器。Optionally, the first node 20 in the communication system 10a is an IIoT node, which may be a device in the industrial Internet of Things, such as a sensor, an actuator, and an I/O box. Etc.; or, it can also be a machine controller in the Industrial Internet of Things.
或者,如图2b所示,本申请实施例还提供另一种通信系统10b。该通信系统10b包括第一节点20,第二节点60,无线接入网设备30,以及核心网设备40,该核心网设备40连接IIoT服务器。Or, as shown in FIG. 2b, the embodiment of the present application also provides another communication system 10b. The communication system 10b includes a first node 20, a second node 60, a wireless access network device 30, and a core network device 40, and the core network device 40 is connected to an IIoT server.
其中,第一节点20向核心网设备40发送第一消息,该第一消息用于向核心网设备40请求建立或修改第一节点20的PDU会话,核心网设备40接收第一消息后,向无线接入网设备30发送第二消息,第二消息用于建立或修改第一节点20的PDU会话。在该第二消息中包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数。无线接入网设备30接收到第二消息后,向第二节点发送第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括一组以太网协议层参数,或者,第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括多组以太网协议层参数中的部分或全部参数。上述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。基于该方案,一方面,本申请实施例在PDU会话建立或修改过程中向无线接入网设备传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点20的数据在第二节点60和无线接入网设备30之间的传输;另一方面,由于无线接入网30设备还向第二节点60发送以太网协议层参数,从而使第二节点也可以基 于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点20和第二节点60之间的数据传输。The first node 20 sends a first message to the core network device 40. The first message is used to request the core network device 40 to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node 20. After receiving the first message, the core network device 40 sends The radio access network device 30 sends a second message, which is used to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node 20. The second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. After receiving the second message, the radio access network device 30 sends to the second node the identity of the first node, the first channel identity, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identity, and the Ethernet corresponding to the first channel identity The protocol layer parameters include a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Based on this solution, on the one hand, the embodiment of the application transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters The data of 20 is transmitted between the second node 60 and the radio access network device 30; on the other hand, because the radio access network 30 device also sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second node 60, the second node is also The data transmission between the first node 20 and the second node 60 can be optimized based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
可选的,该通信系统10b中的第一节点20,是一种IIoT节点,可以是IIoT中的设备,如传感器(sensor),执行器(actuator),进出设备(I/O box)等,第二节点60,是一种IIOT节点,可以是IIoT中的机器控制器,其可以部署在其他无线接入网设备中(即第二节点的类型可以为无线接入网设备),也可以部署在终端设备中(即第二节点的类型可以为终端设备)。Optionally, the first node 20 in the communication system 10b is an IIoT node, which may be a device in the IIoT, such as a sensor, an actuator, an I/O box, etc., The second node 60 is an IIoT node, which can be a machine controller in the IIoT, which can be deployed in other wireless access network equipment (that is, the type of the second node can be a wireless access network equipment), or it can be deployed In the terminal device (that is, the type of the second node may be a terminal device).
其中,在图2b所示的通信系统中,第一节点20可以向第二节点60请求关联,第二节点60允许第一节点20关联后,第二节点60作为中继辅助第一节点20和无线接入网设备30之间的信令和数据传输。此时,第二节点60通过Uu口和无线接入网设备30通信,若第二节点60的类型为无线接入网设备30,第二节点60则通过Uu口和第一节点20通信,若第二节点60的类型为终端设备,第二节点60则通过侧行链路(sidelink,SL)口和第一节点20通信。第一节点20与第二节点60关联后,第二节点60还可以向无线接入网设备30通知该关联关系,例如,第二节点60可以向无线接入网设备30发送第一节点20的标识,其中,第一节点20的标识可以为第二节点60分配给第一节点20的标识、第一节点20在侧行链路中的标识、或者第一节点20的应用层标识中的一个或多个。Wherein, in the communication system shown in FIG. 2b, the first node 20 may request association from the second node 60. After the second node 60 allows the first node 20 to associate, the second node 60 acts as a relay to assist the first node 20 and Signaling and data transmission between radio access network devices 30. At this time, the second node 60 communicates with the wireless access network device 30 through the Uu port. If the type of the second node 60 is the wireless access network device 30, the second node 60 communicates with the first node 20 through the Uu port. The type of the second node 60 is a terminal device, and the second node 60 communicates with the first node 20 through a sidelink (SL) port. After the first node 20 is associated with the second node 60, the second node 60 can also notify the radio access network device 30 of the association relationship. For example, the second node 60 can send the radio access network device 30 the information of the first node 20 Identification, where the identification of the first node 20 may be one of the identification assigned by the second node 60 to the first node 20, the identification of the first node 20 in the side link, or the application layer identification of the first node 20 Or more.
或者,如图2c所示,本申请实施例还提供另一种通信系统10c。该通信系统10c包括第一节点20,第二节点60。Or, as shown in FIG. 2c, another communication system 10c is provided in the embodiment of the present application. The communication system 10c includes a first node 20 and a second node 60.
其中,该通信系统10c中,IIOT业务数据仅在第一节点20与第二节点60之间传输,业务数据无需到达核心网。Wherein, in the communication system 10c, the IIoT service data is only transmitted between the first node 20 and the second node 60, and the service data does not need to reach the core network.
其中,第一节点20的第一协议层实体获取以太网协议层参数,并向第一节点的第二协议层实体发送获取到的以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。该以太网协议层参数用于优化第一节点20与第二节点60之间的数据传输。基于该方案,一方面,可以在节点内的不同协议层之间传输以太网协议层参数;另一方面,可以降低第一节点20优化第一节点20与第二节点60之间的数据传输的复杂度。Wherein, the first protocol layer entity of the first node 20 obtains Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and sends the obtained Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node. The Ethernet protocol layer parameters include the following: Or more: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. The Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node 20 and the second node 60. Based on this solution, on the one hand, Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be transmitted between different protocol layers in the node; on the other hand, the first node 20 can be reduced to optimize the data transmission between the first node 20 and the second node 60. the complexity.
可选的,该通信系统10c中的第一节点20,可以为IIOT中的机器控制器,其可以部署在其他无线接入网设备中(即第一节点20的类型可以为无线接入网设备),此时,第一节点20通过Uu口和第二节点60通信;或者,也可以部署在终端设备中(即第一节点20的类型可以为终端设备),此时,第一节点20通过SL口和第二节点60通信。第二节点60可以为IIOT中的设备,如传感器(sensor),执行器(actuator),进出设备(I/O box)等。Optionally, the first node 20 in the communication system 10c can be a machine controller in the IIoT, which can be deployed in other radio access network equipment (that is, the type of the first node 20 can be a radio access network equipment ), at this time, the first node 20 communicates with the second node 60 through the Uu port; or, it can also be deployed in a terminal device (that is, the type of the first node 20 may be a terminal device), at this time, the first node 20 passes through The SL port communicates with the second node 60. The second node 60 may be a device in the IIoT, such as a sensor (sensor), an actuator (actuator), an access device (I/O box), etc.
可选的,本申请实施例提供的通信系统10a和10b中,无线接入网设备30是一种将第一节点20接入到无线网络的设备,可以是LTE中的演进型基站(evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者5G网络或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的基站gNB或ng-eNB,宽带网络业务网关(broadband network gateway,BNG),汇聚交换机或非第三代合作伙伴项目(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)接入设备等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。可选的,本申请实施例中的基站可以包括各种形式的基站,例如:宏基站,微基站(也称为小站),接入点等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, in the communication systems 10a and 10b provided in the embodiment of the present application, the radio access network device 30 is a device that connects the first node 20 to the wireless network, and may be an evolutionary base station in LTE. B, eNB or eNodeB), or base station gNB or ng-eNB in 5G network or public land mobile network (PLMN), broadband network service gateway (broadband network gateway, BNG), aggregation switch or Non-third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) access equipment, etc., this embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this. Optionally, the base stations in the embodiments of the present application may include base stations of various forms, such as macro base stations, micro base stations (also referred to as small stations), access points, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
一种可能的方式中,本申请实施例中的无线接入网设备30可以由集中单元(central unit,CU)和一个或多个分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)组成。CU和DU可以理解为是对无线接入网设备从逻辑功能角度的划分。其中,CU和DU在物理上可以是分离的,也可以部署在一起,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。CU和DU之间可以通过接口相连,例如可以是F1接口。CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分。例如,无线资源控制(radio resource control, RRC)协议层、业务数据适配协议栈(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)协议层以及分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)协议层的功能设置在CU中,而无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)协议层,媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)协议层,物理(physical,PHY)协议层等的功能设置在DU中。可以理解,对CU和DU处理功能按照这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,也可以按照其他的方式进行划分,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。In a possible manner, the radio access network device 30 in the embodiment of the present application may be composed of a centralized unit (CU) and one or more distributed units (DU). CU and DU can be understood as the division of radio access network equipment from the perspective of logical functions. Wherein, the CU and DU may be physically separated or deployed together, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application. The CU and DU can be connected through an interface, for example, an F1 interface. CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network. For example, the function settings of the radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) protocol layer, the service data adaptation protocol stack (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) protocol layer, and the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) protocol layer In the CU, the functions of the radio link control (RLC) protocol layer, the media access control (MAC) protocol layer, and the physical (PHY) protocol layer are set in the DU. It can be understood that the division of the CU and DU processing functions according to this protocol layer is only an example, and the division may also be performed in other ways, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,CU可以由CU控制面(CU control plane,CU-CP)和CU用户面(CU user plane,CU-UP)组成,CU-CP和CU-UP可以理解为是对CU从逻辑功能的角度进行划分。其中,CU-CP和CU-UP可以根据无线网络的协议层划分,例如,RRC协议层和信令无线承载(signal radio bearer,SRB)对应的PDCP协议层的功能设置在CU-CP中,数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)对应的PDCP协议层的功能设置在CU-UP中,此外,SDAP协议层的功能也可能设置在CU-UP中。Optionally, the CU can be composed of the CU control plane (CU-CP) and the CU user plane (CU-UP). CU-CP and CU-UP can be understood as slave logic functions to the CU The angle is divided. Among them, CU-CP and CU-UP can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network. For example, the functions of the PDCP protocol layer corresponding to the RRC protocol layer and the signaling radio bearer (signal radio bearer, SRB) are set in the CU-CP, and the data The function of the PDCP protocol layer corresponding to the data radio bearer (DRB) is set in the CU-UP. In addition, the function of the SDAP protocol layer may also be set in the CU-UP.
可选的,本申请实施例提供的通信系统10a和10b中,核心网设备40是一种核心网网元,例如,核心网设备40可以是LTE核心网架构中的服务网关(serving gateway,SGW)、移动性管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)等;或者,也可以是5G核心网架构中的用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元,接入及移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元等,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。Optionally, in the communication systems 10a and 10b provided in the embodiments of the present application, the core network device 40 is a core network element. For example, the core network device 40 may be a serving gateway (serving gateway, SGW in the LTE core network architecture). ), mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME), etc.; or, it can also be the user plane function (UPF) network element in the 5G core network architecture, access and mobility management function (access and mobility). Management function (AMF) network elements, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,本申请实施例中的终端设备,可以是用于实现无线通信功能的设备,例如终端或者可用于终端中的芯片等。其中,终端可以是5G网络或者未来演进的PLMN中的用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、终端单元、终端站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、无线通信设备、终端代理或终端装置等。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备或可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。终端可以是移动的,也可以是固定的。Optionally, the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to implement a wireless communication function, such as a terminal or a chip that can be used in a terminal. Among them, the terminal may be a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a terminal unit, a terminal station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, and wireless communication in a 5G network or a future evolved PLMN. Equipment, terminal agent or terminal device, etc. The access terminal can be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices or wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, industrial control (industrial) Wireless terminal in control), wireless terminal in self-driving, wireless terminal in remote medical, wireless terminal in smart grid, wireless terminal in transportation safety (transportation safety) Terminal, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, etc. The terminal can be mobile or fixed.
可选的,本申请实施例中的第一节点20、第二节点60、无线接入网设备30、以及核心网设备40也可以称之为通信装置,其可以是一个通用设备或者是一个专用设备,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the first node 20, the second node 60, the radio access network device 30, and the core network device 40 in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as communication devices, which may be a general-purpose device or a dedicated device. Equipment, this embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this.
可选的,本申请实施例中,图2a、图2b、或图2c中的第一节点20、第二节点60、无线接入网设备30、或者核心网设备40可以通过图3中的通信设备(或通信装置)50来实现。图3所示为本申请实施例提供的通信设备50的结构示意图。该通信设备50包括一个或多个处理器501,通信总线502,以及至少一个通信接口(图3中仅是示例性的以包括通信接口504,以及一个处理器501为例进行说明),可选的还可以包括存储器503。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first node 20, the second node 60, the radio access network device 30, or the core network device 40 in FIG. 2a, FIG. 2b, or FIG. 2c may use the communication in FIG. 3 The device (or communication device) 50 is implemented. FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 50 provided by an embodiment of the application. The communication device 50 includes one or more processors 501, a communication bus 502, and at least one communication interface (in FIG. 3, the communication interface 504 and one processor 501 are taken as an example for illustration), optional The memory 503 may also be included.
处理器501可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。The processor 501 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more programs for controlling the execution of the program of this application. integrated circuit.
通信总线502可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或 扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。该总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图3中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。该通信总线502用于连接通信设备50中的不同组件,使得不同组件可以通信。The communication bus 502 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 3 to represent, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus. The communication bus 502 is used to connect different components in the communication device 50 so that different components can communicate.
通信接口504,可以是收发模块用于与其他设备或通信网络通信,如以太网,无线接入网(radio access network,RAN),无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)等。例如,所述收发模块可以是收发器、收发机一类的装置。可选的,所述通信接口504也可以是位于处理器501内的收发电路,用以实现处理器的信号输入和信号输出。The communication interface 504 may be a transceiver module for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (RAN), wireless local area networks (WLAN), etc. For example, the transceiver module may be a device such as a transceiver or a transceiver. Optionally, the communication interface 504 may also be a transceiver circuit located in the processor 501 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
存储器503可以是具有存储功能的装置。例如可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。存储器可以是独立存在,通过通信线路502与处理器相连接。存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。The memory 503 may be a device having a storage function. For example, it can be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can be stored by a computer Any other media taken, but not limited to this. The memory may exist independently and is connected to the processor through the communication line 502. The memory can also be integrated with the processor.
其中,存储器503用于存储执行本申请方案的计算机执行指令,并由处理器501来控制执行。处理器501用于执行存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令,从而实现本申请实施例中提供的参数传输方法。Wherein, the memory 503 is used to store computer execution instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and the processor 501 controls the execution. The processor 501 is configured to execute computer-executable instructions stored in the memory 503, so as to implement the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
或者,可选的,本申请实施例中,也可以是处理器501执行本申请下述实施例提供的参数传输方法中的处理相关的功能,通信接口504负责与其他设备或通信网络通信,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Or, optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the processor 501 may also perform processing-related functions in the parameter transmission method provided in the following embodiments of the present application, and the communication interface 504 is responsible for communicating with other devices or communication networks. The application embodiment does not specifically limit this.
可选的,本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the computer-executable instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program code, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,处理器501可以包括一个或多个CPU,例如图3中的CPU0和CPU1。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the processor 501 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 3.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信设备50可以包括多个处理器,例如图3中的处理器501和处理器508。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication device 50 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 501 and the processor 508 in FIG. 3. Each of these processors can be a single-CPU (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor. The processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信设备50还可以包括输出设备505和输入设备506。输出设备505和处理器501通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备505可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二级管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备506和处理器501通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备506可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication device 50 may further include an output device 505 and an input device 506. The output device 505 communicates with the processor 501 and can display information in various ways. For example, the output device 505 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait. The input device 506 communicates with the processor 501 and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 506 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
IIOT无线化后,在IIoT中如何传输以太网协议层参数,目前并没有相关的解决方案。基于此,本申请实施例提供一种参数传输方法,该参数传输方法中,第一节点向核心网设备发送第一消息,该第一消息用于向核心网设备请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话,核心网设备接收第一消息后,向无线接入网设备发送第二消息,第二消息用于建立或修改第一节点的 PDU会话。在该第二消息中包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。其中,上述以太网协议层参数用于无线接入网设备优化第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的数据传输。基于该方案,核心网设备在建立或修改PDU会话的过程中,向无线接入网设备传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的数据传输。After IIOT becomes wireless, there is no relevant solution for how to transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters in IIoT. Based on this, an embodiment of the present application provides a parameter transmission method. In the parameter transmission method, the first node sends a first message to the core network device, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the For the PDU session, after receiving the first message, the core network device sends a second message to the radio access network device. The second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node. The second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, Receive window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Wherein, the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used for the wireless access network device to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device. Based on this solution, the core network device transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the process of establishing or modifying the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node and wireless network based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transmission between access network devices.
下面将结合图4至图10,通过具体实施例对本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法进行展开说明。The parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 4 to FIG. 10 through specific embodiments.
需要说明的是,本申请下述实施例中各个网元之间的消息名字或消息中各参数的名字等只是一个示例,具体实现中也可以是其他的名字,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be noted that the name of the message between each network element or the name of each parameter in the message in the following embodiments of this application is just an example, and other names may also be used in specific implementations. The embodiments of this application do not make specific details about this. limited.
需要说明的是,在LTE系统中,本申请实施例中的以太网协议层可以理解为现有的应用层,也可以理解为现有的应用层与PDCP层之间的一个新的协议层;在NR系统中,本申请实施例中的以太网协议层可以理解为现有的应用层,也可以理解为现有的应用层与SDAP层之间的一个新的协议层,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。It should be noted that in the LTE system, the Ethernet protocol layer in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as an existing application layer, or as a new protocol layer between the existing application layer and the PDCP layer; In the NR system, the Ethernet protocol layer in the embodiments of this application can be understood as the existing application layer, and can also be understood as a new protocol layer between the existing application layer and the SDAP layer. This is not specifically limited.
一种可能的实现方式中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法应用于如图2a所示的通信系统中,IIoT服务器与第一节点之间有数据通信,第一节点与无线接入网设备之间建立了无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接的场景,如图4所示,为本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法,该参数传输方法包括如下步骤:In a possible implementation manner, the parameter transmission method provided in this embodiment of the application is applied to the communication system as shown in FIG. 2a. There is data communication between the IIoT server and the first node, and the first node and the wireless access network device A scenario in which a radio resource control (RRC) connection is established between them, as shown in FIG. 4, is the parameter transmission method provided in this embodiment of the application. The parameter transmission method includes the following steps:
S401、第一节点通过无线接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一消息。相应的,核心网设备通过无线接入网设备接收来自第一节点的第一消息。S401: The first node sends a first message to the core network device through the radio access network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the first message from the first node through the wireless access network device.
其中,第一消息用于向核心网设备请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话。The first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
可选的,该第一消息可以为非接入层(non access stratum,NAS)消息,例如PDU会话建立请求(PDU session establishment request)消息或PDU会话修改请求(PDU session modification request)消息。第一节点可以将第一消息包含在RRC消息中,通过与无线接入网设备之间的RRC连接,发送第一消息。无线接入网设备接收来自第一节点的包含第一消息的RRC消息后,向核心网设备转发该第一消息。Optionally, the first message may be a non-access stratum (NAS) message, such as a PDU session establishment request (PDU session establishment request) message or a PDU session modification request (PDU session modification request) message. The first node may include the first message in the RRC message, and send the first message through the RRC connection with the radio access network device. After receiving the RRC message containing the first message from the first node, the radio access network device forwards the first message to the core network device.
其中,核心网设备接收到用于请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话的消息后,执行如下步骤S402,建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话对应的核心网设备与无线接入网设备之间的数据传输通道,例如第一节点的PDU会话对应的S1接口或者NG3接口的用户面隧道,其中,修改第一节点的PDU会话对应的核心网设备与无线接入网设备之间的数据传输通道可以理解为修改该数据传输通道中包括的服务质量(quality of service,QoS)流或修改用户面隧道地址等。Wherein, after the core network device receives the message for requesting to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node, it executes the following step S402 to establish or modify the core network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node and the radio access network device. For example, the user plane tunnel of the S1 interface or NG3 interface corresponding to the PDU session of the first node, where the data transmission channel between the core network device and the radio access network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node is modified It can be understood as modifying the quality of service (QoS) flow included in the data transmission channel or modifying the user plane tunnel address.
S402、核心网设备向无线接入网设备发送第二消息。相应的,无线接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第二消息。S402: The core network device sends a second message to the wireless access network device. Correspondingly, the radio access network device receives the second message from the core network device.
其中,第二消息用于建立或修改上述第一节点请求建立或修改的PDU会话。第二消息中包括一组或多组用于优化第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的数据传输的以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。The second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session requested by the first node to establish or modify. The second message includes one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters for optimizing data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet Size, packet period, packet arrival time, packet lifetime, receive window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
可选的,该第二消息可以为PDU会话资源建立请求(PDU session resource setup request)消息或PDU会话资源修改请求(PDU session resource modification request)消息。其中,第二消息可以包括PDU会话的标识以及该PDU会话对应的核心网设备侧的用户面隧道地址(例 如隧道端点标识或者互联网协议地址(internet protocol address,IP))。无线接入网设备接收到第二消息后,可以向核心网设备发送回复消息,该回复消息中可以包括无线接入网设备侧的用户面隧道地址,至此,第一节点的PDU会话对应的核心网设备和无线接入网设备之间的用户面隧道成功建立或修改。相应的,第一节点的PDU会话对应的用户面隧道建立或修改完成后,无线接入网设备可以通知第一节点建立或修改第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的DRB,相关过程可参考现有技术,在此不再赘述。此外,第二消息中还包括一个或多个QoS流以及对应的QoS参数(为了和以太网协议层参数进行区别,后续称之为蜂窝网QoS参数),其中,每个QoS流用一个服务质量流标识(QoS flow identifier,QFI)所标识。Optionally, the second message may be a PDU session resource setup request (PDU session resource setup request) message or a PDU session resource modification request (PDU session resource modification request) message. The second message may include the identifier of the PDU session and the user plane tunnel address on the core network device side corresponding to the PDU session (for example, tunnel endpoint identifier or internet protocol address (IP)). After the radio access network device receives the second message, it can send a reply message to the core network device. The reply message can include the user plane tunnel address on the radio access network device side. So far, the core corresponding to the PDU session of the first node The user plane tunnel between the network device and the wireless access network device is successfully established or modified. Correspondingly, after the establishment or modification of the user plane tunnel corresponding to the PDU session of the first node is completed, the radio access network device can notify the first node to establish or modify the DRB between the first node and the radio access network device, and the related process can be Refer to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. In addition, the second message also includes one or more QoS flows and corresponding QoS parameters (in order to distinguish them from Ethernet protocol layer parameters, they will be referred to as cellular network QoS parameters later), where each QoS flow uses a quality of service flow Identifier (QoS flow identifier, QFI).
可选的,第二消息包括一组以太网协议层参数时,可以认为以太网协议层参数为PDU会话粒度。该一组以太网协议层参数可以与第一节点的PDU会话的标识对应;或者,若第一节点的PDU会话包含一个QoS流,即第一节点的PDU会话对应一个QFI,则该一组以太网协议层参数与标识该一个QoS流的QFI对应。示例性的,该一组以太网协议层参数与第一节点的PDU会话标识对应时,第二消息中的数据结构可以如下:Optionally, when the second message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be considered as the PDU session granularity. The set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may correspond to the identifier of the PDU session of the first node; or, if the PDU session of the first node includes a QoS flow, that is, the PDU session of the first node corresponds to a QFI, then the set of Ethernet The network protocol layer parameters correspond to the QFI that identifies the one QoS flow. Exemplarily, when the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the PDU session identifier of the first node, the data structure in the second message may be as follows:
>PDU会话标识(PDU session ID);>PDU session ID (PDU session ID);
>以太网协议层参数(Ethernet parameter);>Ethernet protocol layer parameters (Ethernet parameter);
>QoS流建立/修改请求列表(QoS flow setup/modification request list)。>QoS flow setup/modification request list (QoS flow setup/modification request list).
可选的,第二消息包括多组以太网协议层参数,且第一节点的PDU会话包含多个QoS流,即第一节点的PDU会话对应多个QFI时,该多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数分别对应该多个QFI中的一个QFI。此时,可以认为以太网协议层参数以QoS流为粒度,核心网设备可以在第二消息中包括如表1所示的以太网协议层参数与QFI的映射关系。Optionally, the second message includes multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the PDU session of the first node includes multiple QoS flows, that is, when the PDU session of the first node corresponds to multiple QFIs, the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in each corresponds to one of the multiple QFIs. At this time, it can be considered that the Ethernet protocol layer parameters take the QoS flow as the granularity, and the core network device may include the mapping relationship between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI as shown in Table 1 in the second message.
表1Table 1
以太网协议层参数Ethernet protocol layer parameters 以太网协议层参数对应的QFIQFI corresponding to Ethernet protocol layer parameters
第一组参数The first set of parameters QFI 1QFI 1
第二组参数The second set of parameters QFI 2QFI 2
第三组参数The third set of parameters QFI 3QFI 3
示例性的,表1所示的以太网协议层参数与QFI的映射关系可以通过第二消息的如下数据结构表示:Exemplarily, the mapping relationship between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI shown in Table 1 can be represented by the following data structure of the second message:
>PDU会话标识(PDU session ID);>PDU session ID (PDU session ID);
>QoS流建立/修改请求列表(QoS flow setup/modification request list);>QoS flow setup/modification request list (QoS flow setup/modification request list);
>>QFI(QoS Flow Indicator);>>QFI(QoS Flow Indicator);
>>以太网协议层参数(Ethernet parameter)。>>Ethernet protocol layer parameters (Ethernet parameters).
可选的,当第二消息包括一组以太网协议层参数,且该一组以太网协议层参数与QFI对应时,第二消息中的数据结构可以类似于第二消息包括多组以太网协议层参数时的数据结构,区别在于该数据结构中的QoS流建立/修改请求列表中只包含一个QFI和该QFI对应的一组以太网协议层参数。Optionally, when the second message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to QFI, the data structure in the second message may be similar to that in the second message including multiple sets of Ethernet protocols The difference in the data structure of the layer parameter is that the QoS flow establishment/modification request list in the data structure only contains one QFI and a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the QFI.
其中,上述以太网协议层参数中每项表示的含义如下:Among them, the meaning of each item in the above Ethernet protocol layer parameters is as follows:
数据包大小(message size)表示传输的数据包的大小;The data packet size (message size) represents the size of the transmitted data packet;
数据包周期(message period)表示数据包的传输周期;The data packet period (message period) represents the transmission period of the data packet;
数据包到达时间(arrival time)可以是IIoT服务器预计的数据包到达无线接入网设备的时间,也可以是下行数据包到达第一节点的时间,此外,当一个数据包的到达时间确定时,便可根据数据包周期确定每个数据包的到达时间;The arrival time of a data packet can be the time when the data packet is estimated by the IIoT server to reach the wireless access network device, or it can be the time when the downlink data packet arrives at the first node. In addition, when the arrival time of a data packet is determined, The arrival time of each data packet can be determined according to the data packet cycle;
数据包生存时间(survival time)表示数据包传输失败后,发送方需要启动定时器的定时时间,发送方必须在数据包生存时间内将传输失败的数据重新发送给接收方,否则将导致接收方设备关闭;Data packet survival time (survival time) means that after the data packet transmission fails, the sender needs to start the timer time. The sender must resend the failed data to the receiver within the data packet lifetime, otherwise it will cause the receiver Equipment off
接收窗口(Rx window)表示接收方接收数据包的时间范围,只有在接收方的接收窗口内接收的数据包才能被接收方正确处理;The receiving window (Rx window) indicates the time range for the receiver to receive the data packet, and only the data packet received within the receiver's receiving window can be correctly processed by the receiver;
以太网类型(Ethertype)可以包括EtherCAT、Ethernet Powerlink,Sercos III,Ethernet/IP,Profinet,CC-Link IE Field以及Modbus TCP等;Ethertype can include EtherCAT, Ethernet Powerlink, Sercos III, Ethernet/IP, Profinet, CC-Link IE Field and Modbus TCP, etc.;
以太网分组信息(Ethernet packet info)可以包括以太网填充信息(ethernet padding info)、以太网帧帧头大小、以太网帧的子头(sub-headers)信息以及子头对应的节点信息、业务的类型(例如业务是实时业务还是非实时业务)等。Ethernet packet info can include Ethernet padding information (ethernet padding info), Ethernet frame header size, Ethernet frame sub-headers information, and node information and service information corresponding to the sub-headers. Type (for example, whether the service is a real-time service or a non-real-time service), etc.
可选的,无线接入网设备接收到上述一组或多组以太网协议层参数后,可以根据接收到的以太网协议层参数对第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的数据传输进行优化。示例性的,对于上行传输,无线接入网设备可以根据数据包大小和数据包周期,为第一节点配置半静态调度(semi-persistent scheduling,SPS)模式,以减少控制信令开销;或者,示例性的,无线接入网设备可以根据数据包到达时间确定合适的调度起始时间。示例性的,对于下行传输,无线接入网设备确定第一节点接收某个数据包失败后,可以根据生存时间开启定时器,在生存时间内将第一节点接收失败的数据包重新发送给第一节点,保证第一节点在生存时间内成功接收该数据包;或者,示例性的,无线接入网设备可以根据接收窗口,确定合适的调度时间以保证第一节点正确接收并处理数据包;或者,示例性地,无线接入网设备可以根据QFI对应的以太网协议层参数进行DRB映射,例如,将类似的以太网协议层参数对应的QFI所标识的QoS流映射到相同的DRB;Optionally, after the wireless access network device receives the above one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, it can perform data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device according to the received Ethernet protocol layer parameters. optimization. Exemplarily, for uplink transmission, the radio access network device may configure a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) mode for the first node according to the data packet size and the data packet cycle to reduce control signaling overhead; or, Exemplarily, the radio access network device may determine the appropriate scheduling start time according to the arrival time of the data packet. Exemplarily, for downlink transmission, after the radio access network device determines that the first node fails to receive a certain data packet, it can start a timer according to the survival time, and resend the failed data packet received by the first node to the first node within the survival time. A node to ensure that the first node successfully receives the data packet within the lifetime; or, for example, the wireless access network device may determine an appropriate scheduling time according to the receiving window to ensure that the first node correctly receives and processes the data packet; Or, for example, the wireless access network device may perform DRB mapping according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the QFI, for example, map the QoS flows identified by the QFI corresponding to the similar Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the same DRB;
或者,示例性的,无线接入网设备可以根据以太网分组信息中包括的业务的类型,将实时业务的数据包优先发送,将非实时业务的数据包低优先级发送;或者,示例性的,第一节点可以将第一节点的应用层标识以及第一节点所在的应用层的组标识发送给无线接入网设备,无线接入网设备可以为第一节点分配小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI),并保存第一节点的应用层标识与C-RNTI的对应关系,后续核心网设备将发送给第一节点所属的应用层组中的多个节点的数据在一个以太网数据帧中发送时,以太网分组信息可以指示该以太网帧中每个子头对应的数据是发送给该应用层组中哪个节点的(即子头对应的节点信息),例如,以太网分组信息可以在以太网帧的子头信息中,通过一个或多个比特指示该子头对应的节点的应用层标识,无线接入网设备接收到以太网帧后,可以根据该以太网分组信息以及第一节点的应用层标识确定发送给第一节点的数据,然后根据第一节点的应用层标识与C-RNTI的对应关系确定向第一节点发送数据的空口,并通过该空口将数据与对应的子头发送给第一节点。可以理解的是,对于该应用层组中除第一节点之外的其他节点,无线接入网设备也可以通过该方法向其他节点发送各自对应的数据,在此不再赘述。Or, exemplary, the wireless access network device may send data packets of real-time services with priority and send data packets of non-real-time services with low priority according to the types of services included in the Ethernet packet information; or, exemplary The first node may send the application layer identifier of the first node and the group identifier of the application layer where the first node is located to the radio access network device, and the radio access network device may allocate the cell radio network temporary identity (cell radio network temporary identifier, C-RNTI), and save the correspondence between the application layer identifier of the first node and the C-RNTI. The subsequent core network equipment will send data to multiple nodes in the application layer group to which the first node belongs. When sent in an Ethernet data frame, the Ethernet packet information can indicate which node in the application layer group the data corresponding to each subheader in the Ethernet frame is sent to (ie the node information corresponding to the subheader), for example, Ethernet The network packet information can be in the sub-header information of the Ethernet frame, and one or more bits are used to indicate the application layer identification of the node corresponding to the sub-header. After the wireless access network device receives the Ethernet frame, it can be based on the Ethernet packet Information and the application layer identifier of the first node to determine the data to be sent to the first node, and then determine the air interface for sending data to the first node according to the correspondence between the application layer identifier of the first node and the C-RNTI, and transmit the data through the air interface And the corresponding subheader is sent to the first node. It can be understood that, for other nodes in the application layer group except the first node, the radio access network device can also send respective corresponding data to other nodes through this method, which will not be repeated here.
特别地,对于该以太网帧中公共的以太网头,无线接入网设备可以通过组播的方式将其发送给第一节点所属的应用层组中的多个节点,例如,无线接入网设备在广播组播控制信道(multicast control channel,MCCH)或单小区组播控制信道(single cell MCCH,SC-MCCH)的配置信息时携带第一节点所属的应用层组的组标识,后续再通过MCCH或SC-MCCH发送以太网帧中公共的以太网头。该应用层组中的节点接收到公共的以太网头后,可以将该公共的以太网头、该节点对应的子头以及子头对应的数据组合后交由应用层处理。In particular, for the common Ethernet header in the Ethernet frame, the radio access network device can send it to multiple nodes in the application layer group to which the first node belongs, for example, the radio access network When the device broadcasts the multicast control channel (multicast control channel, MCCH) or single cell multicast control channel (single cell MCCH, SC-MCCH) configuration information, it carries the group identification of the application layer group to which the first node belongs, and then passes it MCCH or SC-MCCH sends the common Ethernet header in the Ethernet frame. After the nodes in the application layer group receive the common Ethernet header, they can combine the common Ethernet header, the subheader corresponding to the node, and the data corresponding to the subheader to the application layer for processing.
需要说明的是,上述以太网协议层参数中的以太网分组信息也可以不包含在以太网协议层参数中,而包含在数据中,例如可以包含在核心网设备与无线接入网设备之间的用户面隧道头(GTP-U header)中,无线接入网设备接收到包含以太网分组信息的数据后,可以根据以太网分组信息中的以太网填充信息删除填充部分,然后向第一节点发送删除填充部分后的以太网帧,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。It should be noted that the Ethernet packet information in the above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters may not be included in the Ethernet protocol layer parameters, but included in the data, for example, may be included between the core network equipment and the wireless access network equipment. In the GTP-U header, after the wireless access network device receives the data containing the Ethernet packet information, it can delete the padding part according to the Ethernet padding information in the Ethernet packet information, and then send it to the first node Sending the Ethernet frame with the stuffed part deleted is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,当无线接入网设备由CU以及DU组成时,无线接入网设备的CU接收到第二消息后,可以将第二消息中包括的以太网协议层参数通过F1接口发送给DU,再由DU根据以太网协议层参数优化第一节点与DU之间的数据传输,相关描述可参考上述步骤S402,在此不再赘述。Optionally, when the radio access network device is composed of a CU and a DU, after receiving the second message, the CU of the radio access network device may send the Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message to the DU through the F1 interface Then, the DU optimizes the data transmission between the first node and the DU according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. For related description, please refer to the above step S402, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,当无线接入网设备的CU由CU-CP和CU-UP组成时,上述由CU执行的动作均由CU-CP执行。Optionally, when the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP, the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
基于本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法,第一节点向核心网设备发送请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话的第一消息,核心网设备接收第一消息后,向无线接入网设备发送建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话的第二消息,在该第二消息中包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。本申请实施例在PDU会话建立或修改过程中向无线接入网设备传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的数据传输。Based on the parameter transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the first node sends a first message requesting the establishment or modification of the PDU session of the first node to the core network device, and the core network device sends the first message to the radio access network device after receiving the first message The second message for establishing or modifying the PDU session of the first node includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, Data packet cycle, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. The embodiment of the application transmits Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can optimize the first node and the wireless access network device based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Data transfer between.
可选的,上述如图4所示的参数传输方法中,第二消息包括一组与QFI对应的以太网协议层参数,或者第二消息包括多组以太网协议层参数时,如图5所示,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还包括:Optionally, in the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 4, when the second message includes a group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI, or the second message includes multiple groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, as shown in FIG. 5 As shown, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
S403、无线接入网设备向第一节点发送第三消息。相应的,第一节点接收第三消息。S403. The radio access network device sends a third message to the first node. Correspondingly, the first node receives the third message.
其中,该第三消息包括上述一组或多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定该上行数据对应的QFI。Wherein, the third message includes each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the above one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters It is used for the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data.
可选的,上述每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI可以是核心网设备发送给第一节点的NAS消息中携带的,在该情况下,第三消息即为来自核心网设备的NAS消息,无线接入网设备在接收到核心网设备发送给第一节点的NAS消息后,可以将该NAS消息封装在RRC重配置消息中转发给第一节点,此时,第一节点接收第三消息可以为第一节点通过无线接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第三消息;或者,上述每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI可以是无线接入网设备接收到来自核心网设备的一组或多组以太网协议层参数后,将该一组或多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数封装在第三消息中发送给第一节点的,在该场景下,第一节点接收第三消息可以为第一节点接收来自无线接入网设备的第三消息,第三消息可以为RRC重配置消息。Optionally, each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be carried in the NAS message sent by the core network device to the first node. In this case, the third message is NAS message from the core network device. After receiving the NAS message sent by the core network device to the first node, the radio access network device can encapsulate the NAS message in an RRC reconfiguration message and forward it to the first node. At this time, The first node receiving the third message may be the first node receiving the third message from the core network device through the wireless access network device; or, each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be After the wireless access network device receives one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device, each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters The network protocol layer parameters are encapsulated in a third message and sent to the first node. In this scenario, the first node receiving the third message may be the first node receiving the third message from the radio access network device, and the third message may Reconfiguration message for RRC.
可选的,第一节点接收到该第三消息后,可以根据其生成的上行数据的以太网协议层参数对应的QFI确定该上行数据对应的QFI。示例性的,第一节点生成上行数据后,可以根据该上行数据的数据包大小确定一组以太网协议层参数,该组以太网协议层参数中包括的数据包大小与该上述数据的数据包大小相同或相近,然后将该组以太网协议层对应的QFI,确定为该上行数据对应的QFI。Optionally, after receiving the third message, the first node may determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter of the generated uplink data. Exemplarily, after the first node generates the uplink data, it can determine a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters according to the packet size of the uplink data, and the packet size included in the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the data packet of the above data If the size is the same or similar, the QFI corresponding to the group of Ethernet protocol layers is determined as the QFI corresponding to the uplink data.
基于该方案,由于无线接入网设备将每组以太网协议层参数及对应的QFI发送给第一节 点,从而可以使第一节点根据其生成的上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定上行数据对应的QFI。Based on this scheme, because the wireless access network device sends each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the corresponding QFI to the first node, the first node can determine the corresponding uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates. QFI.
可选的,当无线接入网设备由CU以及DU组成时,无线接入网设备的CU接收到一组与QFI对应的以太网协议层参数或接收到多组以太网协议层参数后,可以将该一组或多组中的每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI通过F1接口发送给DU,再由DU发送给第一节点。Optionally, when the wireless access network device is composed of CU and DU, after the CU of the wireless access network device receives a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI or multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, it can Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the one or more groups and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters are sent to the DU through the F1 interface, and then sent by the DU to the first node.
可选的,当无线接入网设备的CU由CU-CP和CU-UP组成时,上述由CU执行的动作均由CU-CP执行。Optionally, when the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP, the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
可选的,当第一节点从第一无线接入网设备(本申请实施例中的无线接入网设备30)切换到第二无线接入网设备时,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还可以包括:第一无线接入网设备向第二无线接入网设备发送切换请求(handover request)消息,该切换请求消息中包括第一节点的标识,第一节点的PDU会话标识以及该PDU会话标识对应的以太网协议层参数;或者,该切换请求消息中包含第一节点的标识,第一节点的PDU会话标识,一个或多个QFI以及该一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的以太网协议层参数。后续第二无线接入网设备可以根据从第一无线接入网设备接收到的以太网协议层参数对第一节点和第二无线接入网设备之间的数据传输进行优化。Optionally, when the first node switches from the first radio access network device (the radio access network device 30 in the embodiment of this application) to the second radio access network device, the parameter transmission method provided in this embodiment of the application It may also include: the first radio access network device sends a handover request (handover request) message to the second radio access network device, where the handover request message includes the identifier of the first node, the PDU session identifier of the first node, and the PDU The Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the session identifier; or, the handover request message includes the identifier of the first node, the PDU session identifier of the first node, one or more QFIs, and each of the one or more QFIs corresponds to The Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Subsequently, the second wireless access network device may optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second wireless access network device according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters received from the first wireless access network device.
可选地,当第一节点从第一无线接入网设备(本申请实施例中的无线接入网设备30)切换到第二无线接入网设备时,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还可以包括:第一无线接入网设备向核心网设备(例如LTE网络中的MME,或NR网络的AMF)发送切换需求(handover required)消息,该切换需求消息中包含核心网管理设备侧第一节点标识、第一无线接入网设备侧第一节点标识、第二无线接入网设备标识(或者目标小区标识)、切换类型,第一节点的PDU会话标识、第一节点的PDU会话对应的一个或多个QFI、一个或多个QFI中每个QFI对应的DRB标识、一组或多组以太网协议层参数中的一项或多项。其中,第一无线接入网设备可以将第一节点的PDU会话标识、PDU会话对应的一个或多个QFI、一组或多组以太网协议层参数包含在第一无线接入网设备给第二无线接入网设备的消息(例如Source to Target Transparent Container)中。核心网设备接收到来自第一无线接入网设备的切换需求消息后,向第二接入网设备发送切换请求(handover request)消息,切换请求消息中包含从第一无线接入网设备处接收到的切换需求消息中包括的上述信息。后续第二无线接入网设备也可以根据接收到的以太网协议层参数对第一节点和第二无线接入网设备之间的数据传输进行优化。Optionally, when the first node switches from the first radio access network device (the radio access network device 30 in the embodiment of this application) to the second radio access network device, the parameter transmission method provided in this embodiment of the application It may also include: the first radio access network device sends a handover required message to the core network device (for example, the MME in the LTE network, or the AMF in the NR network), and the handover required message includes the second handover request message on the core network management device side. A node ID, the first node ID on the first radio access network device side, the second radio access network device ID (or target cell ID), the handover type, the PDU session ID of the first node, and the PDU session of the first node correspond One or more of the one or more QFIs, the DRB identifier corresponding to each QFI in the one or more QFIs, and one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Wherein, the first radio access network device may include the PDU session identifier of the first node, one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session, one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the first radio access network device to the first node 2. In the message of the radio access network device (for example, Source to Target Transparent Container). After the core network device receives the handover request message from the first radio access network device, it sends a handover request (handover request) message to the second access network device. The handover request message includes the handover request message received from the first radio access network device. The above-mentioned information included in the received handover request message. Subsequently, the second radio access network device may also optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second radio access network device according to the received Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
其中,上述步骤S401至S403中的第一节点、无线接入网设备或者核心网设备的动作可以由图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的应用程序代码来执行,本实施例对此不作任何限制。Wherein, the actions of the first node, radio access network device, or core network device in the foregoing steps S401 to S403 may be executed by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the application program code stored in the memory 503 This embodiment does not impose any restriction on this.
另一种可能的实现方式中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法应用于如图2b所示的通信系统中,IIoT服务器通过第二节点与第一节点之间有数据通信需求,第一节点与无线接入网设备之间建立了RRC连接(例如可以是通过第二节点的中继与无线接入网设备之间建立的RRC连接),且第一节点已经通过了核心网的认证的场景,如图6所示,该参数传输方法包括如下步骤:In another possible implementation manner, the parameter transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 2b. The IIoT server has a data communication requirement between the second node and the first node, and the first node A scenario where an RRC connection is established with the radio access network device (for example, it can be an RRC connection established between the second node's relay and the radio access network device), and the first node has passed the core network authentication As shown in Figure 6, the parameter transmission method includes the following steps:
S601、第一节点通过第二节点和无线接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一消息。相应的,核心网设备通过第二节点和无线接入网设备接收来自第一节点的第一消息。S601. The first node sends a first message to the core network device through the second node and the radio access network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the first message from the first node through the second node and the radio access network device.
其中,第一消息用于向核心网设备请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话。The first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node.
可选的,该第一消息可以为NAS消息,例如PDU会话建立请求或PDU会话修改请求消 息。第一节点可以将第一消息包含在RRC消息中,使用通过第二节点的中继与无线接入网设备之间建立的RRC连接,发送第一消息。无线接入网设备接收来自第一节点的包含第一消息的RRC消息后,向核心网设备转发该第一消息。Optionally, the first message may be a NAS message, such as a PDU session establishment request or a PDU session modification request message. The first node may include the first message in the RRC message, and send the first message using the RRC connection established between the relay of the second node and the radio access network device. After receiving the RRC message containing the first message from the first node, the radio access network device forwards the first message to the core network device.
其中,核心网设备接收到用于请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话的消息后,执行如下步骤S602,建立或修改第一节点的所述PDU会话对应的核心网设备与无线接入网设备之间的数据传输通道,例如,第一节点的PDU会话对应的S1接口或者NG3接口的用户面隧道,其中,修改第一节点的PDU会话对应的核心网设备与无线接入网设备之间的数据传输通道可以理解为修改该数据传输通道中包括的QoS流或修改用户面隧道地址等。Wherein, after the core network device receives the message for requesting the establishment or modification of the PDU session of the first node, it executes the following step S602 to establish or modify the core network device and the radio access network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node For example, the S1 interface or the user plane tunnel of the NG3 interface corresponding to the PDU session of the first node, where the communication between the core network device corresponding to the PDU session of the first node and the radio access network device is modified The data transmission channel can be understood as modifying the QoS flow included in the data transmission channel or modifying the user plane tunnel address.
S602、核心网设备向无线接入网设备发送第二消息。相应的,无线接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第二消息。S602. The core network device sends a second message to the radio access network device. Correspondingly, the radio access network device receives the second message from the core network device.
其中,第二消息用于建立或修改上述PDU会话。第二消息中包括一组或多组用于优化第一节点的数据在第二节点和无线接入网设备之间的传输的以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。Wherein, the second message is used to establish or modify the aforementioned PDU session. The second message includes one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters used to optimize the transmission of the data of the first node between the second node and the radio access network device, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one of the following or Multiple items: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
可选的,该第二消息可以为PDU会话资源建立或修改请求消息。其中,第二消息可以包括PDU会话的标识以及PDU会话对应的核心网设备侧的用户面隧道地址(例如隧道端点标识或者IP地址)。无线接入网设备接收到第二消息后,可以向核心网设备发送回复消息,该回复消息中包括无线接入网设备侧的用户面隧道地址,至此,第一节点的PDU会话对应的核心网设备和无线接入网设备之间的用户面隧道成功建立或修改。相应的,第一节点的PDU会话对应的用户面隧道建立或修改完成后,无线接入网设备可以通知第二节点建立或修改第二节点和无线接入网设备之间的传输通道,以及建立或修改第二节点和第一节点之间的传输通道,相关过程可参考现有技术,在此不再赘述。此外,第二消息中还包括一个或多个QoS流以及对应的蜂窝网QoS参数,其中,每个QoS流用一个QFI所标识。Optionally, the second message may be a PDU session resource establishment or modification request message. The second message may include the identifier of the PDU session and the user plane tunnel address (for example, the tunnel endpoint identifier or IP address) of the core network device side corresponding to the PDU session. After receiving the second message, the radio access network device can send a reply message to the core network device. The reply message includes the user plane tunnel address on the radio access network device side. So far, the core network corresponding to the PDU session of the first node The user plane tunnel between the device and the radio access network device is successfully established or modified. Correspondingly, after the establishment or modification of the user plane tunnel corresponding to the PDU session of the first node is completed, the radio access network device can notify the second node to establish or modify the transmission channel between the second node and the radio access network device, and to establish Or modify the transmission channel between the second node and the first node, and the related process can refer to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. In addition, the second message also includes one or more QoS flows and corresponding cellular network QoS parameters, wherein each QoS flow is identified by a QFI.
可选的,第二消息包括的以太网协议层参数可以为PDU会话粒度的,也可以为QoS流粒度的,相关描述可参考上述步骤S402,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message may be PDU session granularity or QoS flow granularity. For related description, please refer to the above step S402, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,无线接入网设备接收到上述一组或多组以太网协议层参数后,可以根据接收到的以太网协议层参数优化第一节点的数据在第二节点和无线接入网设备之间的传输,其中,无线接入网设备优化第一节点的数据在第二节点和无线接入网设备之间的传输的方法类似于步骤S402中的优化方法,相关描述可参考上述步骤S402,在此不再赘述。Optionally, after the wireless access network device receives the above one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, it can optimize the data of the first node according to the received Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the second node and the wireless access network device The method for the wireless access network device to optimize the transmission of the data of the first node between the second node and the wireless access network device is similar to the optimization method in step S402. For related description, please refer to the above step S402. , I won’t repeat it here.
其中,由于第二节点作为中继辅助第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的信令和数据传输,因此无线接入网设备执行如下步骤S603,将相关以太网协议层参数发送给第二节点,以使第二节点优化第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输。Wherein, because the second node acts as a relay to assist the signaling and data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device, the radio access network device executes the following step S603 to send relevant Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second Node so that the second node optimizes the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
S603、无线接入网设备向第二节点发送第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数。相应的,第二节点接收来自无线接入网设备的第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数。S603: The radio access network device sends the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node. Correspondingly, the second node receives the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier from the wireless access network device.
其中,第一通道标识用于指示第一节点与第二节点之间的一个通道。可选的,第一节点的标识可以为第二节点分配给第一节点的标识、第一节点在侧行链路中的标识、或者第一节点的应用层标识中的一个或多个。由于第二节点可能关联多个节点,而每个节点可能具有相同的通道标识,因此,第一节点的标识可以用于第二节点唯一确定第一节点的第一通道标识。Wherein, the first channel identifier is used to indicate a channel between the first node and the second node. Optionally, the identifier of the first node may be one or more of the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node, the identifier of the first node in the side link, or the application layer identifier of the first node. Since the second node may be associated with multiple nodes, and each node may have the same channel identifier, the identifier of the first node may be used by the second node to uniquely determine the first channel identifier of the first node.
可选的,第一节点向第二节点请求关联时,可以向第二节点发送第一节点在侧行链路中的标识或第一节点的应用层标识,第二节点同意第一节点关联后,可以为第一节点分配标识, 并向第一节点发送回复消息,该回复消息中可以携带第二节点为第一节点分配的标识。第一节点通过第二节点的中继向无线接入网设备发送RRC连接建立请求,第二节点向无线接入网设备转发该RRC连接建立请求时将第二节点为第一节点分配的标识发送给无线接入网设备,后续无线接入网设备和第二节点根据第二节点为第一节点分配的标识识别第一节点;或者,若第二节点没有为第一节点分配标识,则第二节点向无线接入网设备转发第一节点的RRC连接建立请求时,将第一节点在侧行链路中的标识或第一节点的应用层标识发送给无线接入网设备,后续无线接入网设备和第二节点根据第一节点在侧行链路中的标识或第一节点的应用层标识识别第一节点。Optionally, when the first node requests an association from the second node, it may send the identification of the first node in the side link or the application layer identification of the first node to the second node. After the second node agrees to the first node to associate , The first node may be assigned an identifier, and a reply message may be sent to the first node, and the reply message may carry the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node. The first node sends an RRC connection establishment request to the radio access network device through the relay of the second node, and when the second node forwards the RRC connection establishment request to the radio access network device, it sends the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node For the radio access network device, the subsequent radio access network device and the second node identify the first node according to the identifier assigned by the second node to the first node; or, if the second node does not assign an identifier to the first node, the second node When the node forwards the RRC connection establishment request of the first node to the radio access network device, it sends the identification of the first node in the side link or the application layer identification of the first node to the radio access network device, and subsequent wireless access The network device and the second node identify the first node according to the identification of the first node in the side link or the application layer identification of the first node.
可选的,当第二节点的类型为无线接入网设备时,第一通道标识可以为逻辑信道标识(LC identifier,LC ID)或者数据无线承载标识(DRB identifier,DRB ID);当第二节点的类型为终端设备时,第一通道标识可以为逻辑信道标识LC ID或者侧行链路数据无线承载标识SL DRB ID。Optionally, when the type of the second node is a radio access network device, the first channel identifier may be a logical channel identifier (LC identifier, LC ID) or a data radio bearer identifier (DRB identifier, DRB ID); When the type of the node is a terminal device, the first channel identifier may be a logical channel identifier LC ID or a side link data radio bearer identifier SL DRB ID.
可选的,无线接入网设备接收到第二消息后,可以将第一节点的PDU会话对应的一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI所标识的QoS流进行DRB映射,确定一个或多个第一通道标识,从而确定QFI和第一通道标识的对应关系,相关详细实现可参考现有技术,在此不再赘述。Optionally, after receiving the second message, the radio access network device may perform DRB mapping on the QoS flow identified by each of the one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session of the first node to determine one or more The first channel identifier is used to determine the corresponding relationship between the QFI and the first channel identifier. For detailed implementation, please refer to the prior art, which is not repeated here.
可选的,无线接入网设备确定QFI和第一通道标识的对应关系后,可以根据以太网协议层参数与QFI的对应关系、以及QFI与第一通道标识的对应关系确定第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数。在第二消息中包括一组与第一节点的PDU会话的标识对应的以太网协议层参数的情况下,无线接入网设备进行DRB映射后确定的第一通道标识中的每个第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数均为该与PDU会话的标识对应的以太网协议层参数;或者,在第二消息中包括一组与QFI对应的以太网协议层参数的情况下,无线接入网设备进行DRB映射后仅确定一个第一通道标识,且该第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数为该与QFI对应的以太网协议层参数。Optionally, after the wireless access network device determines the corresponding relationship between QFI and the first channel identifier, it may determine the corresponding relationship between the first channel identifier according to the corresponding relationship between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI and the corresponding relationship between QFI and the first channel identifier The Ethernet protocol layer parameters. In the case that the second message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the ID of the PDU session of the first node, each first channel in the first channel ID determined by the radio access network device after DRB mapping The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier are the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier of the PDU session; or, in the case that the second message includes a group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI, wireless access After the network device performs DRB mapping, only one first channel identifier is determined, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the first channel identifier is the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to QFI.
或者,在第二消息中包括多组以太网协议层参数的情况下,无线接入网设备根据以太网协议层参数与QFI的对应关系、以及QFI与第一通道标识的对应确定第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数时,若一个第一通道标识对应一个QFI,则该第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数为该一个QFI所对应的以太网协议层参数;若一个第一通道标识对应多个QFI,则该第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括无线接入网设备对该多个QFI对应的以太网协议层参数进行整合后的以太网协议层参数。Or, in the case that the second message includes multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the wireless access network device determines the first channel identifier according to the correspondence between the Ethernet protocol layer parameters and QFI, and the correspondence between QFI and the first channel identifier For the corresponding Ethernet protocol layer parameters, if a first channel identifier corresponds to a QFI, the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the first channel identifier is the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the one QFI; if a first channel If the identifier corresponds to multiple QFIs, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include the Ethernet protocol layer parameters obtained by the wireless access network device integrating the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the multiple QFIs.
示例性的,以无线接入网设备接收到的第二消息包括四组以太网协议层参数为例,该四组以太网协议层参数包括的内容以及其分别对应的QFI如表2所示,无线接入网设备确定的QFI与第一通道标识的对应关系如表3所示。其中,第一通道标识1对应QFI1和QFI2,则无线接入网设备对QFI1和QFI2对应的以太网协议层参数进行整合后的第一通道标识1对应的以太网协议层参数可以如下:第一通道标识1对应的以太网协议层参数可以包括QFI1对应的第一组以太网协议层参数或QFI2对应的第二组以太网协议层参数中的一组参数,例如包括QFI1对应的第一组以太网协议层参数:数据包大小1、数据包周期1、以及接收窗口1;或者,第一通道标识1对应的以太网协议层参数可以包括QFI1对应的第一组以太网协议层参数和QFI2对应的第二组以太网协议层参数,例如包括数据包大小1、数据包周期1、接收窗口1、数据包大小1、以及数据包生存时间1;或者,第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数可以包括QFI1对应的第一组和QFI2对应的第二组两组参数中的部分参数,例如包括数据包大小1、数据包周期1、接收窗口1。Exemplarily, taking the second message received by the wireless access network device including four sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters as an example, the content included in the four sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and their respective corresponding QFIs are shown in Table 2. The corresponding relationship between the QFI determined by the radio access network device and the first channel identifier is shown in Table 3. Among them, the first channel identifier 1 corresponds to QFI1 and QFI2, and the wireless access network device integrates the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 and QFI2. The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 1 may be as follows: The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to channel ID 1 may include the first group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 or the second group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI2, for example, the first group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 Network protocol layer parameters: data packet size 1, data packet period 1, and receiving window 1; or, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 1 may include the first group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI1 and corresponding to QFI2 The second set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters includes, for example, data packet size 1, data packet period 1, receiving window 1, data packet size 1, and data packet lifetime 1; or, the Ethernet protocol layer corresponding to the first channel identifier The parameters may include some of the first group of parameters corresponding to QFI1 and the second group of parameters corresponding to QFI2, for example, including data packet size 1, data packet period 1, and receiving window 1.
此外,无线网络设备确定的第一通道标识2对应的以太网协议层参数包括QFI3对应的第三组以太网协议层参数:数据包到达时间1;第一通道标识3对应的以太网协议层参数包括QFI4对应的第四组以太网协议层参数:数据包周期2、以太网类型1。此时,无线接入网设备向第二节点发送的内容包括第一节点的标识、第一通道标识1以及第一通道标识1对应的以太网协议层参数、第一通道标识2以及第一通道标识2对应的以太网协议层参数、第一通道标识3以及第一通道标识3对应的以太网协议层参数。In addition, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 2 determined by the wireless network device include the third group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI3: packet arrival time 1; the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 3 Including the fourth group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI4: packet cycle 2, Ethernet type 1. At this time, the content sent by the wireless access network device to the second node includes the identification of the first node, the first channel identification 1, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identification 1, the first channel identification 2 and the first channel The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier 2, the first channel identifier 3, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier 3.
表2Table 2
以太网协议层参数Ethernet protocol layer parameters 以太网协议层参数对应的QFIQFI corresponding to Ethernet protocol layer parameters
第一组:数据包大小1、数据包周期1、接收窗口1The first group: data packet size 1, data packet period 1, receiving window 1 QFI 1 QFI 1
第二组:数据包大小1、数据包生存时间1The second group: data packet size 1, data packet survival time 1 QFI 2 QFI 2
第三组:数据包到达时间1The third group: data packet arrival time 1 QFI 3QFI 3
第四组:数据包周期2、以太网类型1The fourth group: packet cycle 2, Ethernet type 1 QFI 4QFI 4
表3table 3
以太网协议层参数对应的QFIQFI corresponding to Ethernet protocol layer parameters QFI对应的第一通道标识The first channel identification corresponding to QFI
QFI 1QFI 1 11
QFI 2 QFI 2 11
QFI 3QFI 3 22
QFI 4QFI 4 33
可选的,无线接入网设备可以通过RRC重配置消息向第二节点发送第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,也可以通过其他消息发送,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。Optionally, the radio access network device may send the identity of the first node, the first channel identity, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identity to the second node through the RRC reconfiguration message, or may send it through other messages The embodiments of this application do not specifically limit this.
可选的,第二节点接收到来自无线接入网设备的第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数后,可以根据第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数对第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输进行优化。示例性的,第二节点可以根据第一通道标识对应的以太网分组信息确定该第一通道标识对应的以太网填充部分的大小,后续通过第一通道标识所指示的第一通道向第一节点发送数据包时,可以先删除以太网填充部分再发送数据包;或者,示例性的,第二节点也可以根据第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数对第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输进行其他优化,其中,第二节点对第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输进行优化的方法类似于步骤S402中无线接入网设备对第一节点和无线接入网设备之间的数据传输进行优化的方法。Optionally, after receiving the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier from the wireless access network device, the second node may use the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier. The network protocol layer parameters optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node. Exemplarily, the second node may determine the size of the Ethernet padding part corresponding to the first channel identifier according to the Ethernet packet information corresponding to the first channel identifier, and subsequently send the first channel to the first node through the first channel indicated by the first channel identifier. When sending a data packet, the Ethernet padding part can be deleted before sending the data packet; or, as an example, the second node can also compare the parameters between the first node and the second node according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier. Other optimizations are performed for the data transmission between the first node and the second node by the second node. The method for optimizing the data transmission between the first node and the second node is similar to that between the radio access network device and the first node and the radio access network device in step S402. The method of optimizing data transmission between.
需要说明的是,若每个数据包的以太网填充部分的大小不同,核心网设备可以在发送给无线接入网设备的数据包的包头携带该数据包的以太网填充信息,例如,在S1或NG接口的GTP-U中携带,无线接入网设备在收到携带以太网填充信息的数据包后,可以在发送给第二节点的数据包的PDCP头中携带以太网填充信息,第二节点收到携带以太网填充信息的数据包后,可以根据该以太网填充信息删除数据包的填充部分,再将数据包发送给第一节点。It should be noted that if the size of the Ethernet padding part of each data packet is different, the core network device can carry the Ethernet padding information of the data packet in the header of the data packet sent to the wireless access network device, for example, in S1 Or carried in the GTP-U of the NG interface. After receiving the data packet carrying the Ethernet filling information, the wireless access network device can carry the Ethernet filling information in the PDCP header of the data packet sent to the second node. After the node receives the data packet carrying the Ethernet padding information, it can delete the padding part of the data packet according to the Ethernet padding information, and then send the data packet to the first node.
可选的,当无线接入网设备由CU以及DU组成时,无线接入网设备的CU接收到第二消息后,可以建立QFI与第一通道标识的对应关系,并确定每个第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,然后将第一节点的标识、第一节点的PDU对应的一个或多个QFI、该一个或多个QFI中每个QFI对应的第一通道标识、以及每个第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数发送给DU,再由DU将第一节点的标识、每个第一通道标识、以及每个第一通道标识对应的以 太网协议层参数发送给第二节点;或者,CU也可以将第一节点的PDU对应的一个或多个QFI、该一个或多个QFI中每个QFI对应的第一通道标识、以及一组或多组以太网协议层参数发送给DU,由DU确定第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,然后将第一节点的标识、每个第一通道标识、以及每个第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数发送给第二节点。此外,CU还可以将第二消息包括的一组或多组以太网协议层参数发送给DU,以使DU优化第一节点的数据在第二节点和DU的传输,相关描述可参考上述步骤S402,在此不再赘述。Optionally, when the radio access network device is composed of a CU and a DU, after receiving the second message, the CU of the radio access network device can establish the corresponding relationship between the QFI and the first channel identifier, and determine each first channel Identify the corresponding Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and then combine the identification of the first node, the one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU of the first node, the first channel identification corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and each The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier are sent to the DU, and the DU sends the identifier of the first node, each first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each first channel identifier to the second Node; or, the CU may also send one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU of the first node, the first channel identifier corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters To the DU, the DU determines the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier, and then sends the first node identifier, each first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each first channel identifier to the first node Two nodes. In addition, the CU may also send one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters included in the second message to the DU, so that the DU optimizes the transmission of the data of the first node between the second node and the DU. For related description, please refer to the above step S402. , I won’t repeat it here.
可选的,当无线接入网设备的CU由CU-CP和CU-UP组成时,上述由CU执行的动作均由CU-CP执行。Optionally, when the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP, the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
可选的,在另一种可能的实现方式中,步骤S603中无线接入网设备发送给第二节点的内容可以包括:第一节点的标识、第一节点的PDU会话对应的一个或多个QFI、一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的第一通道标识、以及该一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的以太网协议层参数。后续由第二节点确定第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,以便对第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输进行优化;或者,后续第二节点产生的数据需要向第一节点发送时,第二节点可以根据一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的以太网协议层参数以及该数据的以太网协议层参数,确定该数据对应的QFI,并且通过一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的第一通道标识以及该数据对应的QFI,确定向第一节点发送该数据的第一通道。此外,无线接入网设备发送给第二节点的内容还可以包括第一节点的PDU会话对应的一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的蜂窝网QoS参数,此时,若将以太网协议层参数理解为IIOT QoS参数,即可以认为无线接入网设备向第二节点发送QFI对应的IIOT QoS参数和蜂窝网QoS参数的映射关系。Optionally, in another possible implementation manner, the content sent by the radio access network device to the second node in step S603 may include: the identifier of the first node, one or more corresponding to the PDU session of the first node QFI, the first channel identifier corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs. Subsequently, the second node determines the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier in order to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node; or, the subsequent data generated by the second node needs to be sent to the first node At this time, the second node can determine the QFI corresponding to the data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each QFI in one or more QFIs and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the data, and pass the QFI in one or more QFIs The first channel identifier corresponding to each QFI and the QFI corresponding to the data determine the first channel for sending the data to the first node. In addition, the content sent by the radio access network device to the second node may also include the cellular network QoS parameters corresponding to each of the one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session of the first node. At this time, if the Ethernet protocol is used Layer parameters are understood as IIoT QoS parameters, that is, it can be considered that the radio access network device sends the mapping relationship between the IIoT QoS parameters corresponding to the QFI and the cellular network QoS parameters to the second node.
或者,可选的,在又一种可能的实现方式中,若第一节点和第二节点之间建立了RRC连接,步骤S603中无线接入网设备发送给第二节点的内容可以包括:第一节点的标识、第一节点的PDU会话对应的一个或多个QFI、该一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的以太网协议层参数、以及该一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的蜂窝网QoS参数。第二节点接收到该内容后,可以将一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI进行DRB映射,即确定每个QFI与第一通道标识的对应关系,并将该对应关系发送给第一节点。此外,第二节点还向第一节点发送该一个或多个QFI中的每个QFI对应的蜂窝网QoS参数。Or, optionally, in another possible implementation manner, if an RRC connection is established between the first node and the second node, the content sent by the radio access network device to the second node in step S603 may include: The identifier of a node, one or more QFIs corresponding to the PDU session of the first node, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs, and each QFI of the one or more QFIs Corresponding cellular network QoS parameters. After receiving the content, the second node may perform DRB mapping on each QFI of the one or more QFIs, that is, determine the corresponding relationship between each QFI and the first channel identifier, and send the corresponding relationship to the first node. In addition, the second node also sends the cellular network QoS parameter corresponding to each QFI of the one or more QFIs to the first node.
基于本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法,第一节点向核心网设备发送请求建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话的第一消息,核心网设备接收第一消息后,向无线接入网设备发送建立或修改第一节点的PDU会话的第二消息。该第二消息中包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数。无线接入网设备接收到第二消息后,向第二节点发送第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,其中,当第二消息包括一组以太网协议层参数时,所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括所述一组以太网协议层参数,或者,当第二消息包括多组以太网协议层参数时,第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括所述多组以太网协议层参数中的部分或全部参数。上述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。相比于现有技术,一方面,本申请实施例在PDU会话建立或修改过程中向无线接入网设备传输以太网协议层参数,从而可以使无线接入网设备基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点的数据在第二节点和无线接入网设备之间的传输;另一方面,由于无线接入网设备向第二节点发送以太网协议层参数,从而使第二节点也可以基于以太网协议层参数优化第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输。Based on the parameter transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the first node sends a first message requesting the establishment or modification of the PDU session of the first node to the core network device, and the core network device sends the first message to the radio access network device after receiving the first message The second message for establishing or modifying the PDU session of the first node. The second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. After receiving the second message, the radio access network device sends to the second node the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier, where the second message includes a group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or, when the second message includes multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the first channel The Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the identifier include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The above-mentioned Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Compared with the prior art, on the one hand, the embodiments of the present application transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the wireless access network device during the establishment or modification of the PDU session, so that the wireless access network device can be optimized based on the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The data of the first node is transmitted between the second node and the wireless access network device; on the other hand, because the wireless access network device sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second node, the second node can also be based on Ethernet The network protocol layer parameters optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
可选的,上述如图6所示的参数传输方法中,无线接入网设备还可以向第二节点发送第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,该第二通道标识用于指示第二节点与无线接入网设备之间的一个通道,该第二通道标识可以为逻辑信道标识LC ID或者数据无线承载标识DRB ID。Optionally, in the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 6, the radio access network device may also send a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate the second node For a channel with a radio access network device, the second channel identifier may be a logical channel identifier LC ID or a data radio bearer identifier DRB ID.
可选的,当无线接入网设备由CU以及DU组成时,无线接入网设备的CU还可以建立第一通道标识与第二通道标识的对应关系,然后将第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识发送给DU。其中,CU可以将第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识与上述步骤S603中CU发送给DU的内容一起发送;或者,也可以单独将第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识单独发送给DU,此时,CU发送给DU的内容还包括第一节点的标识。Optionally, when the radio access network device is composed of a CU and a DU, the CU of the radio access network device may also establish a corresponding relationship between the first channel identifier and the second channel identifier, and then assign the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier. The channel identifier is sent to the DU. Wherein, the CU may send the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier together with the content sent by the CU to the DU in step S603; or, it may also separately send the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the DU. At this time, the content sent by the CU to the DU also includes the identity of the first node.
可选的,当无线接入网设备的CU由CU-CP和CU-UP组成时,上述由CU执行的动作均由CU-CP执行。Optionally, when the CU of the radio access network device is composed of a CU-CP and a CU-UP, the aforementioned actions performed by the CU are all performed by the CU-CP.
可选的,不同的第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识可以相同,如第一通道标识1和第一通道标识2均对应第二通道标识1;或者,不同的第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识也可以不同,如第一通道标识1对应第二通道标识1,第一通道标识2对应第二通道标识2,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。Optionally, the second channel identifiers corresponding to different first channel identifiers may be the same, for example, the first channel identifier 1 and the first channel identifier 2 both correspond to the second channel identifier 1; or the first channel identifiers corresponding to the different first channel identifiers The two channel identifiers may also be different. For example, the first channel identifier 1 corresponds to the second channel identifier 1, and the first channel identifier 2 corresponds to the second channel identifier 2, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,无线接入网设备可以将第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识与上述步骤S603中发送给第二节点的内容一起发送,此时,无线接入网设备向第二节点发送的内容包括:第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数、以及第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识;或者,无线接入网设备也可以单独发送第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,此时,无线接入网设备还需要向第二节点发送第一节点的标识,以使第二节点确定唯一确定第一节点的第一通道标识。Optionally, the radio access network device may send the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier together with the content sent to the second node in step S603. At this time, the radio access network device sends the second node to the second node. The content includes: the identification of the first node, the first channel identification, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identification, and the second channel identification corresponding to the first channel identification; or, the wireless access network device can also send the first channel separately A second channel identifier corresponding to a channel identifier. At this time, the radio access network device also needs to send the identifier of the first node to the second node, so that the second node can determine the first channel identifier that uniquely determines the first node.
基于该方案,由于无线接入网设备向第二节点发送第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,因此可以使第二节点从第二通道接收到第一节点的上行数据后,根据第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识确定向无线接入网设备发送该上行数据的第二通道。Based on this solution, since the radio access network device sends the second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, it can make the second node receive the uplink data of the first node from the second channel, according to the first channel The second channel identifier corresponding to the identifier determines the second channel for sending the uplink data to the radio access network device.
可选的,上述如图6所示的参数传输方法中,第二消息包括一组与QFI对应的以太网协议层参数,或者第二消息包括多组以太网协议层参数时,如图7所示,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还包括:Optionally, in the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 6, when the second message includes a set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI, or the second message includes multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, as shown in FIG. As shown, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
S604、无线接入网设备向第一节点发送第三消息。相应的,第一节点接收第三消息。S604. The radio access network device sends a third message to the first node. Correspondingly, the first node receives the third message.
其中,该第三消息包括上述一组或多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定该上行数据对应的QFI。Wherein, the third message includes each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the above one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters is used The first node determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data.
可选的,上述每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI可以是核心网设备发送给第一节点的NAS消息中携带的,在该情况下,第三消息即为来自核心网设备的NAS消息,无线接入网设备在接收到核心网设备发送给第一节点的NAS消息后,可以将该NAS消息封装在RRC重配置消息中转发给第二节点,再由第二节点发送给第一节点,此时,第一节点接收第三消息可以为第一节点通过第二节点和无线接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第三消息;或者,上述每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI可以是无线接入网设备接收到来自核心网设备的一组或多组以太网协议层参数后,将该一组或多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数封装在第三消息中通过第二节点发送给第一节点的,在该场景下,第一节点接收第三消息可以为第一节点通过第二节点接收来自无线接入网设备的第三消息,第三消息可以为RRC重配置消息。Optionally, each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be carried in the NAS message sent by the core network device to the first node. In this case, the third message is The NAS message from the core network device. After receiving the NAS message sent by the core network device to the first node, the radio access network device can encapsulate the NAS message in an RRC reconfiguration message and forward it to the second node, and then the first node The two nodes send to the first node. At this time, the first node to receive the third message may mean that the first node receives the third message from the core network device through the second node and the radio access network device; or, each group of Ethernets mentioned above The protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters can be that after the wireless access network device receives one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device, the one or more sets of Ethernet protocol Each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the layer parameters are encapsulated in a third message and sent to the first node through the second node. In this scenario, the first node may receive the third message as The first node receives the third message from the radio access network device through the second node, and the third message may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,第一节点接收到该第三消息后,可以根据其生成的上行数据的以太网协议层参 数对应的QFI确定该上行数据对应的QFI,相关描述可参考上述步骤S403,在此不再赘述。Optionally, after the first node receives the third message, it can determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the QFI corresponding to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data it generates. For related description, please refer to the above step S403. Repeat it again.
基于该方案,由于核心网设备将每组以太网协议层参数以及每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI发送给第一节点,从而可以使第一节点根据其生成的上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定上行数据对应的QFI。其中,上述步骤S601至S604中的第一节点、第二节点、无线接入网设备或者核心网设备的动作可以由图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的应用程序代码来执行,本实施例对此不作任何限制。Based on this scheme, the core network device sends each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node, so that the first node can be based on the Ethernet protocol layer of the uplink data generated by it. The parameter determines the QFI corresponding to the uplink data. Wherein, the actions of the first node, the second node, the radio access network device, or the core network device in the above steps S601 to S604 may be called by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 to call the application stored in the memory 503 The program code is executed, and this embodiment does not impose any restriction on this.
又一种可能的实现方式中,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法应用于如图2c所示的通信系统中,如图8所示,该参数传输方法包括如下步骤:In another possible implementation manner, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 2c. As shown in FIG. 8, the parameter transmission method includes the following steps:
S801、第一节点的第一协议层实体获取以太网协议层参数。S801: The first protocol layer entity of the first node obtains Ethernet protocol layer parameters.
其中,以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。该以太网协议层参数用于优化第一节点与第二节点之间的数据传输,上述每项所表示的含义可参考上述步骤S401中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. The Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node. For the meaning of each of the above items, refer to the related description in the above step S401, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,第一协议层实体可以为应用层实体或以太网协议层实体。Optionally, the first protocol layer entity may be an application layer entity or an Ethernet protocol layer entity.
S802、第一节点的第一协议层实体向第一节点的第二协议层实体发送以太网协议层参数。S802. The first protocol layer entity of the first node sends Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
可选的,第一节点的第一协议层实体获取以太网协议层参数后,可以将获取到的以太网协议层参数下发给第一节点的第二协议层实体,以便第二协议层实体优化第一节点与第二节点之间的数据传输。Optionally, after the first protocol layer entity of the first node obtains the Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the obtained Ethernet protocol layer parameters may be sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node so that the second protocol layer entity Optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node.
可选的,第二协议层实体可以为无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层实体、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层实体、或者物理(physics,PHY)层实体中的一种或多种。Optionally, the second protocol layer entity may be a radio link control (RLC) layer entity, a media access control (media access control, MAC) layer entity, or a physical (physics, PHY) layer entity. One or more.
可选的,第一节点的第二协议层实体接收到以太网协议层参数后,可以根据以太网协议层参数进行传输优化。示例性的,第二协议层实体为MAC层实体时,第一节点的MAC层实体可以根据数据包大小和数据包周期,生成相应的调度策略,例如为第二节点配置半静态调度SPS模式,或者例如第一节点的MAC层实体可以根据数据包大小准备相应的传输资源。Optionally, after receiving the Ethernet protocol layer parameters, the second protocol layer entity of the first node may perform transmission optimization according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters. Exemplarily, when the second protocol layer entity is a MAC layer entity, the MAC layer entity of the first node may generate a corresponding scheduling policy according to the data packet size and the data packet cycle, for example, configure the semi-static scheduling SPS mode for the second node, Or, for example, the MAC layer entity of the first node may prepare corresponding transmission resources according to the size of the data packet.
或者,示例性的,第二协议层实体为RLC层实体时,第一节点的RLC层实体可以根据以太网分组信息中的以太网填充信息(ethernet padding info)对数据进行分段,例如将以太网帧分为包含数据的部分和包含填充的部分,并将包含填充的部分删除后再将以太网帧发送给第二节点。第一节点的RLC层实体还可以根据数据包的大小,确定待发送数据包的传输块大小(transmission block size,TBS),并将待发送数据包的TBS发送给第一节点的MAC层实体,以便第一节点的MAC层实体准备相应的传输资源。Or, for example, when the second protocol layer entity is an RLC layer entity, the RLC layer entity of the first node may segment the data according to the ethernet padding information in the Ethernet packet information, for example, the Ethernet The net frame is divided into a part containing data and a part containing padding, and the part containing padding is deleted before sending the Ethernet frame to the second node. The RLC layer entity of the first node may also determine the transmission block size (TBS) of the data packet to be sent according to the size of the data packet, and send the TBS of the data packet to be sent to the MAC layer entity of the first node, So that the MAC layer entity of the first node prepares corresponding transmission resources.
基于该方案,由于第一节点的第一协议层实体可以将以太网协议层参数发送给第一节点的第二协议层实体,第一节点的第二协议层实体可以直接利用该以太网协议层参数进行优化。因此,一方面,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法可以在节点内的不同协议层之间传输以太网协议层参数;另一方面,相比于现有技术中,第一节点的MAC层实体根据信道条件,资源块数量等确定待发送数据包的TBS以准备相应的传输资源,并且由MAC层实体通知RLC层实体待发送数据包的TBS,使RLC层实体根据TBS进行组包的过程,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法可以降低第一节点传输优化的复杂度。Based on this solution, since the first protocol layer entity of the first node can send Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node, the second protocol layer entity of the first node can directly use the Ethernet protocol layer Parameters are optimized. Therefore, on the one hand, the parameter transmission method provided by the embodiments of the present application can transmit Ethernet protocol layer parameters between different protocol layers in a node; on the other hand, compared to the prior art, the MAC layer entity of the first node According to channel conditions, the number of resource blocks, etc., determine the TBS of the data packet to be sent to prepare the corresponding transmission resources, and the MAC layer entity informs the RLC layer entity of the TBS of the data packet to be sent, so that the RLC layer entity performs the process of grouping packets according to the TBS. The parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application can reduce the complexity of the first node transmission optimization.
可选的,上述如图8所示的参数传输方法中,还可以包括:第一节点获取第二节点的子网拓扑信息,其中,第二节点的子网表示第二节点连接其他IIOT设备的情况,子网拓扑信息用于第一节点的第一协议层实体确定向第一节点的第二协议层实体发送的数据的格式。Optionally, the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 may further include: the first node obtains the subnet topology information of the second node, where the subnet of the second node indicates that the second node is connected to other IOT devices In case, the subnet topology information is used by the first protocol layer entity of the first node to determine the format of the data sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
可选的,第一节点获取第二节点的子网拓扑信息可以为:第一节点接收来自第二节点的子网拓扑信息。基于此,如图9所示,上述如图8所示的参数传输方法还可以包括:Optionally, the first node acquiring the subnet topology information of the second node may be: the first node receives the subnet topology information from the second node. Based on this, as shown in FIG. 9, the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 may further include:
S803、第二节点向第一节点发送子网拓扑信息。相应的,第一节点接收来自第二节点的子网拓扑信息。S803. The second node sends the subnet topology information to the first node. Correspondingly, the first node receives the subnet topology information from the second node.
其中,该子网拓扑信息可以指示第二节点是否携带子网,例如,承载子网拓扑信息的比特位取值为1表示第二节点携带子网,即第二节点连接有其他IIOT设备,取值为0表示第二节点不携带子网,即第二节点未连接其他IIOT设备;或者,该子网拓扑信息还可以指示第二节点携带的子网的拓扑结构,例如指示子网的拓扑结构为星型(star)、线型(line)或环型(ring);或者,该子网拓扑信息还可以指示第二节点携带的子网为有线子网或无线子网。可以理解的是,该子网拓扑信息还可以指示第二节点携带的子网的其他信息,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。Wherein, the subnet topology information can indicate whether the second node carries a subnet. For example, a value of 1 for the bit carrying the subnet topology information indicates that the second node carries the subnet, that is, the second node is connected to other IOT devices, and A value of 0 means that the second node does not carry a subnet, that is, the second node is not connected to other IOT devices; or, the subnet topology information can also indicate the topology of the subnet carried by the second node, for example, indicate the topology of the subnet It is a star, line, or ring; or, the subnet topology information may also indicate that the subnet carried by the second node is a wired subnet or a wireless subnet. It is understandable that the subnet topology information may also indicate other information of the subnet carried by the second node, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,步骤S803之前,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还可以包括:第一节点向第二节点发送请求消息,以请求第二节点上报其子网拓扑信息。第二节点接收到来自第一节点的该请求消息后,向第一节点发送子网拓扑信息;或者,第二节点也可以周期性地向第一节点上报其子网拓扑信息,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。Optionally, before step S803, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application may further include: the first node sends a request message to the second node to request the second node to report its subnet topology information. After receiving the request message from the first node, the second node sends the subnet topology information to the first node; alternatively, the second node may also report its subnet topology information to the first node periodically, in this embodiment of the application There is no specific restriction on this.
可选的,第一节点获取到第二节点的子网拓扑信息后,可以根据该子网拓扑信息进行传输优化,例如,根据第二节点的子网拓扑信息确定第一节点的第一协议层实体向第一节点的第二协议层实体发送的数据的格式。示例性的,对于以太网类型为EtherCAT的业务,若子网拓扑信息指示第二节点携带的子网结构为环型结构,则第一节点的第一协议层实体可以将该环型结构上的所有用户的数据合并到一个EtherCAT数据包,发送给第一节点的第二协议层实体。Optionally, after the first node obtains the subnet topology information of the second node, it can perform transmission optimization according to the subnet topology information, for example, determine the first protocol layer of the first node according to the subnet topology information of the second node The format of the data sent by the entity to the second protocol layer entity of the first node. Exemplarily, for a service whose Ethernet type is EtherCAT, if the subnet topology information indicates that the subnet structure carried by the second node is a ring structure, the first protocol layer entity of the first node may The user's data is combined into an EtherCAT data packet and sent to the second protocol layer entity of the first node.
可选的,第一节点还可以根据第二节点的子网拓扑信息确定向第二节点携带的子网中的节点发送数据的方式,例如,若子网拓扑信息指示第二节点携带的子网结构为星型结构,则第一节点将EtherCAT数据包头中包含的数据通过MCCH或SC-MCCH组播发送,而将该EtherCAT数据包中包含的不同节点的数据通过专用控制信道(Dedicated Control Channel,DCCH)分别发送。另外,当第一节点连接多个第二节点,第一节点和多个第二节点通过EtherCAT方式通信时,第一节点也可以将EtherCAT数据包头中包含的数据通过MCCH或SC-MCCH组播发送,而将该EtherCAT数据包中包含的不同节点的数据通过DCCH分别发送。Optionally, the first node may also determine the manner of sending data to nodes in the subnet carried by the second node according to the subnet topology information of the second node, for example, if the subnet topology information indicates the subnet structure carried by the second node In a star structure, the first node sends the data contained in the EtherCAT packet header through MCCH or SC-MCCH multicast, and the data of different nodes contained in the EtherCAT packet through a dedicated control channel (Dedicated Control Channel, DCCH )send separately. In addition, when the first node is connected to multiple second nodes, and the first node and multiple second nodes communicate via EtherCAT, the first node can also send the data contained in the EtherCAT packet header via MCCH or SC-MCCH multicast , And the data of different nodes contained in the EtherCAT packet are sent separately through the DCCH.
基于上述方案,针对本地终结业务,即业务数据仅在第一节点和第二节点之间传输,无需到达核心网的业务,第一节点可以根据第二节点的子网拓扑信息优化第一节点的第一协议层与第二协议层之间的数据传输或第一节点和第二节点的数据传输,从而可以提高第一节点的优化性能。Based on the above solution, for local termination services, that is, service data is only transmitted between the first node and the second node, and does not need to reach the core network services, the first node can optimize the first node's network topology information based on the second node's subnet topology information The data transmission between the first protocol layer and the second protocol layer or the data transmission between the first node and the second node can improve the optimization performance of the first node.
需要说明是,上述步骤S803与步骤S801没有严格的先后顺序,可以先执行步骤S801,再执行步骤S803;或者,也可以先执行步骤S803,再执行步骤S801;或者,还可以同时执行步骤S801和步骤S803,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。It should be noted that there is no strict sequence between step S803 and step S801. Step S801 can be performed first, and then step S803; or, step S803 can be performed first, and then step S801; or, step S801 and step S801 can be performed simultaneously. Step S803, this embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this.
可选的,上述如图8或图9所示的参数传输方法中,还可以包括:第一节点获取第二节点的第一协议层标识。Optionally, the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9 may further include: the first node obtains the first protocol layer identifier of the second node.
可选的,第一节点获取第二节点的第一协议层标识可以为:第一节点接收来自第二节点的所述第二节点的第一协议层标识。基于此,如图10所示,上述如图8或图9所示的参数传输方法还可以包括:Optionally, the first node acquiring the first protocol layer identifier of the second node may be: the first node receives the first protocol layer identifier of the second node from the second node. Based on this, as shown in FIG. 10, the parameter transmission method shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9 may further include:
S804、第二节点向第一节点发送第二节点的第一协议层标识。相应的,第一节点接收第 二节点的第一协议层标识。S804: The second node sends the first protocol layer identifier of the second node to the first node. Correspondingly, the first node receives the first protocol layer identifier of the second node.
可选的,步骤S804之前,本申请实施例提供的参数传输方法还可以包括:第一节点向第二节点发送请求消息,请求第二节点上报其第一协议层标识。第二节点接收到该请求消息后,向第一节点发送其第一协议层标识;或者,第二节点可以在向第二节点请求关联时向第一节点上报其第一协议层标识,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。Optionally, before step S804, the parameter transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application may further include: the first node sends a request message to the second node, requesting the second node to report its first protocol layer identifier. After receiving the request message, the second node sends its first protocol layer identifier to the first node; alternatively, the second node may report its first protocol layer identifier to the first node when requesting association from the second node. This application The embodiment does not specifically limit this.
可选的,第一节点接收到第二节点的第一协议层标识后,若第一节点部署在无线接入网设备中,则第一节点确定并保存第二节点的第一协议层标识与Uu口标识(即C-RNTI)的对应关系;若第一节点部署在终端设备中,则第一节点确定并保存第二节点的第一协议层标识与侧行链路SL口标识(即近场通信用户设备标识(Proximity service enable user equipment identifier,ProSe UE ID))的对应关系。后续当第一节点向第二节点发送数据时,第一节点的第一协议层可以通知第一节点的第二协议层以太网帧中每个子头对应的数据应该发送给哪个节点,以便第一节点的第二协议层确定发送给第二节点的数据,同时,第一节点可以根据第二节点的第一协议层标识与接口标识(Uu口标识或SL口标识)的对应关系,以及第二节点的第一协议层标识确定向第二节点发送数据的接口标识,从而通过该接口标识指示的接口向第二节点发送数据。示例性的,以第一节点部署在无线接入网设备中,第二节点的第一协议层标识为第一协议层标识1为例,第一节点保存的第二节点的第一协议层标识与Uu口标识的对应关系可以为:第一协议层标识1:C-RNTI 1;后续第一节的第二协议层确定发送给第二节点的数据后,根据该对应关系可以确定向第二节点发送数据的接口标识为C-RNTI 1,进而通过C-RNTI 1指示的接口向第二节点发送数据。需要说明的是,在本地终结业务的场景下,若第二节点携带有线子网,则第二节点收到来自第一节点的数据后需要将以太网帧补齐到64字节后,再将数据包发送给子网中的其他节点。Optionally, after the first node receives the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, if the first node is deployed in the radio access network device, the first node determines and saves the first protocol layer identifier of the second node and The corresponding relationship between the Uu port identifier (ie C-RNTI); if the first node is deployed in the terminal device, the first node determines and saves the first protocol layer identifier of the second node and the side link SL port identifier (ie, near Field communication user equipment identifier (Proximity service enable user equipment identifier, ProSe UE ID)). Subsequently, when the first node sends data to the second node, the first protocol layer of the first node can notify the first node to which node the data corresponding to each subheader in the second protocol layer Ethernet frame should be sent, so that the first The second protocol layer of the node determines the data sent to the second node. At the same time, the first node can determine the corresponding relationship between the first protocol layer identifier of the second node and the interface identifier (Uu port identifier or SL port identifier), and the second The first protocol layer identifier of the node determines the interface identifier for sending data to the second node, so that the data is sent to the second node through the interface indicated by the interface identifier. Exemplarily, taking the first node deployed in the radio access network device, the first protocol layer identifier of the second node is the first protocol layer identifier 1, as an example, the first protocol layer identifier of the second node saved by the first node The corresponding relationship with the Uu port identifier can be: the first protocol layer identifier 1: C-RNTI 1; after the second protocol layer in the subsequent section 1 determines the data sent to the second node, the corresponding relationship can determine the second node The interface identifier for the node sending data is C-RNTI 1, and the data is sent to the second node through the interface indicated by C-RNTI 1. It should be noted that in the scenario of locally terminating services, if the second node carries a wired subnet, the second node needs to fill in the Ethernet frame to 64 bytes after receiving the data from the first node, and then add The data packet is sent to other nodes in the subnet.
基于上述方案,针对本地终结业务,第一节点还可以根据第二节点的第一协议层标识优化第一节点和第二节点之间的数据传输,从而可以提高第一节点的优化性能。Based on the above solution, for the local termination service, the first node can also optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node according to the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, thereby improving the optimization performance of the first node.
需要说明是,上述步骤S804与步骤S801没有严格的先后顺序,可以先执行步骤S801,再执行步骤S804;或者,也可以先执行步骤S804,再执行步骤S801;或者,还可以同时执行步骤S801和步骤S804,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。It should be noted that there is no strict sequence between step S804 and step S801. Step S801 can be performed first, and then step S804; alternatively, step S804 can be performed first, and then step S801; or, step S801 and step S801 can be performed simultaneously. Step S804, this embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this.
其中,上述步骤S801至S804中的第一节点、或者第二节点的动作可以由图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的应用程序代码来执行,本实施例对此不作任何限制。Wherein, the actions of the first node or the second node in the above steps S801 to S804 may be executed by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the application program code stored in the memory 503, and this embodiment There are no restrictions.
可以理解的是,以上各个实施例中,由第一节点实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于第一节点的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现,由无线接入网设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于无线接入网设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现,由核心网设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于核心网设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。It can be understood that, in the above embodiments, the methods and/or steps implemented by the first node can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the first node, and methods implemented by wireless access network equipment And/or steps can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in wireless access network devices, and methods and/or steps implemented by core network devices can also be implemented by components (such as chips) that can be used in core network devices. Or circuit) implementation.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的,本申请实施例还提供了通信装置,该通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的第一节点,或者包含上述第一节点的装置,或者为可用于第一节点的部件;或者,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的无线接入网设备,或者包含上述无线接入网设备的装置,或者为可用于接入网的部件;或者,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的核心网设备,或者包含上述核心网设备的装置,或者为可用于核心网设备的部件。可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤, 本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements. Correspondingly, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which is used to implement the foregoing various methods. The communication device may be the first node in the foregoing method embodiment, or a device including the foregoing first node, or a component that can be used for the first node; or, the communication device may be the wireless access in the foregoing method embodiment Network equipment, or a device including the above-mentioned wireless access network equipment, or a component that can be used in an access network; or, the communication device may be the core network equipment in the foregoing method embodiment, or a device including the above-mentioned core network equipment, Or a component that can be used in core network equipment. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that in combination with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例中对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiments of the present application may divide the communication device into functional modules according to the foregoing method embodiments. For example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
比如,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的无线接入网设备为例。图11示出了一种无线接入网设备110的结构示意图。该无线接入网设备110包括接收模块1101和发送模块1102。所述接收模块1101也可以称为接收单元用以实现接收功能,例如可以是接收电路,接收机,接收器或者通信接口;所述发送模块1102,也可以称为发送单元用以实现发送功能,例如可以是发送电路,发送机,发送器或者通信接口。For example, take the communication device as the wireless access network device in the foregoing method embodiment as an example. FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of a wireless access network device 110. The wireless access network device 110 includes a receiving module 1101 and a sending module 1102. The receiving module 1101 may also be called a receiving unit to implement a receiving function, for example, it may be a receiving circuit, a receiver, a receiver or a communication interface; the sending module 1102 may also be called a sending unit to implement a sending function, For example, it can be a transmitting circuit, a transmitter, a transmitter, or a communication interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,接收模块1101,用于接收来自第一节点的第一消息,该第一消息用于向核心网设备请求建立或修改所述第一节点的PDU会话。发送模块1102,用于向核心网设备发送该第一消息。接收模块1101,还用于接收来自该核心网设备的第二消息,该第二消息用于建立或修改所述PDU会话,该第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。其中,该太网协议层参数用于优化所述第一节点和所述无线接入网设备的数据传输。In a possible implementation manner, the receiving module 1101 is configured to receive a first message from the first node, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node. The sending module 1102 is configured to send the first message to the core network device. The receiving module 1101 is further configured to receive a second message from the core network device. The second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session. The second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The network protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Wherein, the Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device.
可选的,发送模块1102,还用于向第二节点发送该第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及该第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,该第一通道标识用于指示该第一节点与该第二节点之间的一个通道,该第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括该一组以太网协议层参数,或者,所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括该多组以太网协议层参数中的部分或全部参数,该第一节点通过该第二节点连接到该无线接入网设备。Optionally, the sending module 1102 is further configured to send the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the first channel identifier is used to indicate A channel between the first node and the second node, the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the first channel identifier includes the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or the Ethernet protocol corresponding to the first channel identifier The layer parameters include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the first node is connected to the radio access network device through the second node.
可选的,发送模块1102,还用于向该第二节点发送该第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,该第二通道标识用于指示该第二节点与该无线接入网设备之间的一个通道。Optionally, the sending module 1102 is further configured to send a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate the communication between the second node and the radio access network device Of one channel.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be cited in the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
在本实施例中,该无线接入网设备110以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC,电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中,本领域的技术人员可以想到该无线接入网设备110可以采用图3所示的通信设备50的形式。In this embodiment, the radio access network device 110 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. The "module" here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions. In a simple embodiment, those skilled in the art can imagine that the wireless access network device 110 may adopt the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
比如,图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501可以通过调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令,使得无线接入网设备110执行上述方法实施例中的参数传输方法。For example, the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503 to make the wireless access network device 110 execute the parameter transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
具体的,图11中的接收模块1101和发送模块1102的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图11中的接收模块1101和发送模块1102的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的通信接口504来实现。Specifically, the function/implementation process of the receiving module 1101 and the sending module 1102 in FIG. 11 can be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503. Alternatively, the functions/implementation process of the receiving module 1101 and the sending module 1102 in FIG. 11 may be implemented through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
由于本实施例提供的无线接入网设备110可执行上述的参数传输方法,因此其所能获得 的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the radio access network device 110 provided in this embodiment can perform the above-mentioned parameter transmission method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
或者,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的核心网设备为例。图12示出了一种核心网设备120的结构示意图。该核心网设备120包括接收模块1201和发送模块1202。所述接收模块1201也可以称为接收单元用以实现接收功能,例如可以是接收电路,接收机,接收器或者通信接口;所述发送模块1202,也可以称为发送单元用以实现发送功能,例如可以是发送电路,发送机,发送器或者通信接口。Or, take the communication device as the core network device in the foregoing method embodiment as an example. FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a core network device 120. The core network device 120 includes a receiving module 1201 and a sending module 1202. The receiving module 1201 may also be called a receiving unit to realize the receiving function, for example, it may be a receiving circuit, a receiver, a receiver or a communication interface; the sending module 1202 may also be called a sending unit to realize the sending function, For example, it can be a transmitting circuit, a transmitter, a transmitter, or a communication interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,接收模块1201,用于接收来自第一节点的第一消息,该第一消息用于向该核心网设备请求建立或修改该第一节点的PDU会话。发送模块1202,用于向无线接入网设备发送第二消息,该第二消息用于建立或修改该PDU会话,该第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。其中,该以太网协议层参数用于优化该第一节点和所述无线接入网设备的数据传输。In a possible implementation manner, the receiving module 1201 is configured to receive a first message from a first node, and the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the PDU session of the first node. The sending module 1202 is configured to send a second message to the wireless access network device. The second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session. The second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information. Wherein, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node and the wireless access network device.
可选的,发送模块1202,还用于向该第一节点发送多组或与QFI对应的一组中的每组以太网协议层参数以及该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于该第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定该上行数据对应的QFI。Optionally, the sending module 1202 is further configured to send multiple groups or each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in a group corresponding to QFI and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node. The QFI corresponding to the group Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used by the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter of the uplink data.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be cited in the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
在本实施例中,该核心网设备120以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC,电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中,本领域的技术人员可以想到该核心网设备120可以采用图3所示的通信设备50的形式。In this embodiment, the core network device 120 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. The "module" here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions. In a simple embodiment, those skilled in the art can imagine that the core network device 120 may take the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
比如,图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501可以通过调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令,使得核心网设备120执行上述方法实施例中的参数传输方法。For example, the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503 to enable the core network device 120 to execute the parameter transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
具体的,图12中的接收模块1201和发送模块1202的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图12中的接收模块1201和发送模块1202的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的通信接口504来实现。Specifically, the function/implementation process of the receiving module 1201 and the sending module 1202 in FIG. 12 may be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503. Alternatively, the functions/implementation process of the receiving module 1201 and the sending module 1202 in FIG. 12 may be implemented through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
由于本实施例提供的核心网设备120可执行上述的参数传输方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the core network device 120 provided in this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned parameter transmission method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
或者,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的第一节点为例。图13示出了一种第一节点130的结构示意图。该第一节点130包括接收模块1301和发送模块1302。所述接收模块1301也可以称为接收单元用以实现接收功能,例如可以是接收电路,接收机,接收器或者通信接口;所述发送模块1302,也可以称为发送单元用以实现发送功能,例如可以是发送电路,发送机,发送器或者通信接口。Or, take the communication device as the first node in the foregoing method embodiment as an example. FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a first node 130. The first node 130 includes a receiving module 1301 and a sending module 1302. The receiving module 1301 may also be called a receiving unit to realize the receiving function, for example, it may be a receiving circuit, a receiver, a receiver or a communication interface; the sending module 1302 may also be called a sending unit to realize the sending function, For example, it can be a transmitting circuit, a transmitter, a transmitter, or a communication interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,发送模块1302,用于向核心网设备发送第一消息,该第一消息用于向该核心网设备请求建立或请求该第一节点的PDU会话。接收模块1301,用于接收来自该核心网设备的多组或一组与QFI对应的以太网协议层参数中每组以太网协议层参数以及该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,该每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于该通信装置根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定该上行数据对应的QFI,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。In a possible implementation manner, the sending module 1302 is configured to send a first message to the core network device, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or request a PDU session of the first node. The receiving module 1301 is used to receive multiple groups or a group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to QFI from the core network device for each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The QFI corresponding to the group Ethernet protocol layer parameters is used by the communication device to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data. The Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data Packet cycle, data packet arrival time, data packet lifetime, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be cited in the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
在本实施例中,该第一节点130以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC,电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中,本领域的技术人员可以想到该第一节点130可以采用图3所示的通信设备50的形式。In this embodiment, the first node 130 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. The "module" here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions. In a simple embodiment, those skilled in the art can imagine that the first node 130 may take the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
比如,图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501可以通过调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令,使得第一节点130执行上述方法实施例中的参数传输方法。For example, the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503, so that the first node 130 executes the parameter transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
具体的,图13中的接收模块1301和发送模块1302的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图13中的接收模块1301和发送模块1302的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的通信接口504来实现。Specifically, the function/implementation process of the receiving module 1301 and the sending module 1302 in FIG. 13 can be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503. Alternatively, the functions/implementation process of the receiving module 1301 and the sending module 1302 in FIG. 13 may be implemented through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
由于本实施例提供的第一节点130可执行上述的参数传输方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the first node 130 provided in this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned parameter transmission method, the technical effect that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
或者,以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的第一节点为例。图14示出了另一种第一节点140的结构示意图。该第一节点140包括处理模块1401和收发模块1402。所述收发模块1402,也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能,例如可以是收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口。Or, take the communication device as the first node in the foregoing method embodiment as an example. FIG. 14 shows a schematic structural diagram of another first node 140. The first node 140 includes a processing module 1401 and a transceiver module 1402. The transceiver module 1402 may also be called a transceiver unit to implement sending and/or receiving functions, for example, it may be a transceiver circuit, transceiver, transceiver or communication interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块1401,用于第一节点的第一协议层实体获取以太网协议层参数。收发模块1402,用于第一节点的第一协议层实体向第一节点的第二协议层实体发送该以太网协议层参数,该以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息,该以太网协议层参数用于优化该第一节点与第二节点之间的数据传输。In a possible implementation manner, the processing module 1401 is used for the first protocol layer entity of the first node to obtain Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The transceiver module 1402 is used for the first protocol layer entity of the first node to send the Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the second protocol layer entity of the first node, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size , Data packet cycle, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize the data transmission between the first node and the second node .
可选的,处理模块1401,还用于获取该第二节点的子网拓扑信息,该子网拓扑信息用于该第一节点的第一协议层实体确定向该第一节点的第二协议层实体发送的数据的格式。Optionally, the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain subnet topology information of the second node, where the subnet topology information is used by the first protocol layer entity of the first node to determine the second protocol layer of the first node The format of the data sent by the entity.
可选的,处理模块1401,还用于通过收发模块1402向第二节点发送请求消息,以请求第二节点上报其子网拓扑信息。Optionally, the processing module 1401 is further configured to send a request message to the second node through the transceiver module 1402 to request the second node to report its subnet topology information.
可选的,处理模块1401,还用于获取第二节点的子网拓扑信息,包括:处理模块1401,用于通过收发模块1402接收来自第二节点的子网拓扑信息。可选的,处理模块1401,还用于获取该第二节点的第一协议层标识,该第二节点的第一协议层标识用于确定向该第二节点发送的数据对应的接口标识。Optionally, the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain subnet topology information of the second node, and includes: a processing module 1401, configured to receive the subnet topology information from the second node through the transceiver module 1402. Optionally, the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, where the first protocol layer identifier of the second node is used to determine the interface identifier corresponding to the data sent to the second node.
可选的,处理模块1401,还用于通过收发模块1402向第二节点发送请求消息,以请求第二节点上报其第一协议层标识。Optionally, the processing module 1401 is further configured to send a request message to the second node through the transceiver module 1402 to request the second node to report its first protocol layer identifier.
可选的,处理模块1401,还用于获取第二节点的第一协议层标识,包括:处理模块1401,用于通过收发模块1402接收来自第二节点的第一协议层标识。Optionally, the processing module 1401 is further configured to obtain the first protocol layer identifier of the second node, and includes: a processing module 1401 configured to receive the first protocol layer identifier from the second node through the transceiver module 1402.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be cited in the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
在本实施例中,该第一节点140以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC,电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中,本领域的技术人员可以想到该第一节点140可以采用图3所示的通信设备50的形式。In this embodiment, the first node 140 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. The "module" here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions. In a simple embodiment, those skilled in the art can imagine that the first node 140 may take the form of the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
比如,图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501可以通过调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令,使得第一节点140执行上述方法实施例中的数据传输方法。For example, the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 503, so that the first node 140 executes the data transmission method in the foregoing method embodiment.
具体的,图14中的处理模块1401和收发模块1402的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图14中的处理模块1401的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的处理器501调用存储器503中存储的计算机执行指令来实现,图14中的收发模块1402的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的通信设备50中的通信接口504来实现。Specifically, the functions/implementation process of the processing module 1401 and the transceiver module 1402 in FIG. 14 may be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503. Alternatively, the function/implementation process of the processing module 1401 in FIG. 14 can be implemented by the processor 501 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 503, /The realization process can be realized through the communication interface 504 in the communication device 50 shown in FIG. 3.
由于本实施例提供的第一节点140可执行上述的参数传输方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the first node 140 provided in this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned parameter transmission method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
可选的,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置(例如,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统),该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置还包括存储器。该存储器,用于保存必要的程序指令和数据,处理器可以调用存储器中存储的程序代码以指令该通信装置执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。当然,存储器也可以不在该通信装置中。该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system), and the communication device includes a processor for implementing the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments. In a possible design, the communication device further includes a memory. The memory is used to store necessary program instructions and data, and the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments. Of course, the memory may not be in the communication device. When the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。本申请实施例中,计算机可以包括前面所述的装置。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or includes one or more data storage devices such as servers, data centers, etc. that can be integrated with the medium. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)). In the embodiment of the present application, the computer may include the aforementioned device.
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although the present application is described with reference to various embodiments, in the process of implementing the claimed application, those skilled in the art can understand and understand by viewing the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims. Implement other changes of the disclosed embodiment. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "one" does not exclude multiple. A single processor or other unit may implement several functions listed in the claims. Certain measures are described in mutually different dependent claims, but this does not mean that these measures cannot be combined to produce good results.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Although the application has been described in combination with specific features and embodiments, it is obvious that various modifications and combinations can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, this specification and drawings are merely exemplary descriptions of the application defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to have covered any and all modifications, changes, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the application without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of this application fall within the scope of the claims of this application and their equivalent technologies, this application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (29)

  1. 一种参数传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A parameter transmission method, characterized in that the method includes:
    无线接入网设备接收来自第一节点的第一消息,所述第一消息用于向核心网设备请求建立或修改所述第一节点的协议数据单元PDU会话;The radio access network device receives a first message from the first node, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify a protocol data unit PDU session of the first node;
    所述无线接入网设备向所述核心网设备发送所述第一消息;Sending, by the radio access network device, the first message to the core network device;
    所述无线接入网设备接收来自所述核心网设备的第二消息,所述第二消息用于建立或修改所述PDU会话,所述第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,所述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息;所述以太网协议层参数用于优化所述第一节点和所述无线接入网设备的数据传输。The radio access network device receives a second message from the core network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, and the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters The Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; The network protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括所述PDU会话的标识,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述PDU会话的标识。The method according to claim 1, wherein the second message includes an identifier of the PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the PDU session.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括一个服务质量流标识QFI,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述一个QFI;或者,The method according to claim 1, wherein the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the one QFI; or,
    所述第二消息包括多个QFI,所述多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数分别对应所述多个QFI中的每个QFI。The second message includes multiple QFIs, and each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to each QFI of the multiple QFIs.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述无线接入网设备向第二节点发送所述第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,所述第一通道标识用于指示所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间的一个通道,所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括所述一组以太网协议层参数,或者,所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括所述多组以太网协议层参数中的部分或全部参数,所述第一节点通过所述第二节点连接到所述无线接入网设备。The wireless access network device sends to the second node the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier, where the first channel identifier is used to indicate all For a channel between the first node and the second node, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier include the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or the first channel identifier corresponds to The Ethernet protocol layer parameters include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the first node is connected to the radio access network device through the second node.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述无线接入网设备向所述第二节点发送所述第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,所述第二通道标识用于指示所述第二节点与所述无线接入网设备之间的一个通道。The radio access network device sends a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate the relationship between the second node and the radio access network device A passage between.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二通道标识为逻辑信道标识、或者数据无线承载标识。The method according to claim 5, wherein the second channel identifier is a logical channel identifier or a data radio bearer identifier.
  7. 根据权利要求4-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一通道标识为逻辑信道标识、数据无线承载标识、或者侧行链路数据无线承载标识。The method according to any one of claims 4-6, wherein the first channel identifier is a logical channel identifier, a data radio bearer identifier, or a side link data radio bearer identifier.
  8. 一种参数传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A parameter transmission method, characterized in that the method includes:
    核心网设备接收来自第一节点的第一消息,所述第一消息用于向所述核心网设备请求建立或修改所述第一节点的协议数据单元PDU会话;The core network device receives a first message from the first node, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify a protocol data unit PDU session of the first node;
    所述核心网设备向无线接入网设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于建立或修改所述PDU会话,所述第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,所述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息;所述以太网协议层参数用于优化所述第一节点和所述无线接入网设备的数据传输。The core network device sends a second message to the radio access network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, and the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and The Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; the Ethernet protocol layer The parameter is used to optimize data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括所述PDU会话的标识,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述PDU会话的标识。The method according to claim 8, wherein the second message includes an identifier of the PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the PDU session.
  10. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括一个服务质量流标识QFI,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述一个QFI;或者,The method according to claim 8, wherein the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the one QFI; or,
    所述第二消息包括多个QFI,所述多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数分别对应所述多个QFI中的每个QFI。The second message includes multiple QFIs, and each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to each QFI of the multiple QFIs.
  11. 根据权利要求8或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述核心网设备向所述第一节点发送所述一组或多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于所述第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定所述上行数据对应的QFI。The core network device sends each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node. The QFI corresponding to the group Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used by the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter of the uplink data.
  12. 一种参数传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A parameter transmission method, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一节点向核心网设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于向所述核心网设备请求建立或修改所述第一节点的协议数据单元PDU会话;The first node sends a first message to the core network device, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or modify the protocol data unit PDU session of the first node;
    所述第一节点接收来自所述核心网设备的一组或多组以太网协议层参数中每组以太网协议层参数以及所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于所述第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定所述上行数据对应的QFI,所述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。The first node receives each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters. The QFI corresponding to the network protocol layer parameters is used by the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size , Data packet cycle, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  13. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:接收模块和发送模块;A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes: a receiving module and a sending module;
    所述接收模块,用于接收来自第一节点的第一消息,所述第一消息用于向核心网设备请求建立或修改所述第一节点的协议数据单元PDU会话;The receiving module is configured to receive a first message from a first node, where the first message is used to request a core network device to establish or modify a protocol data unit PDU session of the first node;
    所述发送模块,用于向所述核心网设备发送所述第一消息;The sending module is configured to send the first message to the core network device;
    所述接收模块,还用于接收来自所述核心网设备的第二消息,所述第二消息用于建立或修改所述PDU会话,所述第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,所述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息;所述以太网协议层参数用于优化所述第一节点和所述通信装置的数据传输。The receiving module is further configured to receive a second message from the core network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, and the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layers Parameters, the Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; The Ethernet protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node and the communication device.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括所述PDU会话的标识,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述PDU会话的标识。The communication device according to claim 13, wherein the second message includes an identifier of the PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the PDU session.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括一个服务质量流标识QFI,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述一个QFI;或者,The communication device according to claim 13, wherein the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the one QFI; or,
    所述第二消息包括多个QFI,所述多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数分别对应所述多个QFI中的每个QFI。The second message includes multiple QFIs, and each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to each QFI of the multiple QFIs.
  16. 根据权利要求13-15任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,The communication device according to any one of claims 13-15, wherein:
    所述发送模块,还用于向第二节点发送所述第一节点的标识、第一通道标识、以及所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数,所述第一通道标识用于指示所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间的一个通道,所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括所述一组以太网协议层参数,或者,所述第一通道标识对应的以太网协议层参数包括所述多组以太网协议层参数中的部分或全部参数,所述第一节点通过所述第二节点连接到所述通信装置。The sending module is further configured to send the identifier of the first node, the first channel identifier, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the first channel identifier is used to indicate For a channel between the first node and the second node, the Ethernet protocol layer parameter corresponding to the first channel identifier includes the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, or the first channel identifier corresponds to The Ethernet protocol layer parameters include some or all of the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, and the first node is connected to the communication device through the second node.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的通信装置,其特征在于,The communication device according to claim 16, wherein:
    所述发送模块,还用于向所述第二节点发送所述第一通道标识对应的第二通道标识,所述第二通道标识用于指示所述第二节点与所述通信装置之间的一个通道。The sending module is further configured to send a second channel identifier corresponding to the first channel identifier to the second node, where the second channel identifier is used to indicate the communication between the second node and the communication device One channel.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二通道标识为逻辑信道标识、或者数据无线承载标识。The communication device according to claim 17, wherein the second channel identifier is a logical channel identifier or a data radio bearer identifier.
  19. 根据权利要求16-18任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一通道标识为逻 辑信道标识、数据无线承载标识、或者侧行链路数据无线承载标识。The communication device according to any one of claims 16-18, wherein the first channel identifier is a logical channel identifier, a data radio bearer identifier, or a side link data radio bearer identifier.
  20. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:接收模块和发送模块;A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes: a receiving module and a sending module;
    所述接收模块,用于接收来自第一节点的第一消息,所述第一消息用于向所述通信装置请求建立或修改所述第一节点的协议数据单元PDU会话;The receiving module is configured to receive a first message from a first node, where the first message is used to request the communication device to establish or modify a protocol data unit PDU session of the first node;
    所述发送模块,用于向无线接入网设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于建立或修改所述PDU会话,所述第二消息包括一组或多组以太网协议层参数,所述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息;所述以太网协议层参数用于优化所述第一节点和所述无线接入网设备的数据传输。The sending module is configured to send a second message to a radio access network device, the second message is used to establish or modify the PDU session, and the second message includes one or more sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters, The Ethernet protocol layer parameters include one or more of the following: data packet size, data packet period, data packet arrival time, data packet survival time, receiving window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information; The protocol layer parameters are used to optimize data transmission between the first node and the radio access network device.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括所述PDU会话的标识,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述PDU会话的标识。The communication device according to claim 20, wherein the second message includes an identifier of the PDU session, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the identifier of the PDU session.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括一个服务质量流标识QFI,所述一组以太网协议层参数对应所述一个QFI;或者,The communication device according to claim 21, wherein the second message includes a quality of service flow identifier QFI, and the set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to the one QFI; or,
    所述第二消息包括多个QFI,所述多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数分别对应所述多个QFI中的每个QFI。The second message includes multiple QFIs, and each set of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the multiple sets of Ethernet protocol layer parameters corresponds to each QFI of the multiple QFIs.
  23. 根据权利要求20或22所述的通信装置,其特征在于,The communication device according to claim 20 or 22, wherein:
    所述发送模块,还用于向所述第一节点发送所述一组或多组以太网协议层参数中的每组以太网协议层参数以及所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于所述第一节点根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定所述上行数据对应的QFI。The sending module is further configured to send each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in the one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters to the first node, The QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters is used by the first node to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameters of the uplink data.
  24. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:接收模块和发送模块;A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes: a receiving module and a sending module;
    所述发送模块,用于向核心网设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于向所述核心网设备请求建立或请求所述通信装置的协议数据单元PDU会话;The sending module is configured to send a first message to a core network device, where the first message is used to request the core network device to establish or request a protocol data unit PDU session of the communication device;
    所述接收模块,用于接收来自所述核心网设备的一组或多组以太网协议层参数中每组以太网协议层参数以及所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI,所述每组以太网协议层参数对应的QFI用于所述通信装置根据上行数据的以太网协议层参数确定所述上行数据对应的QFI,所述以太网协议层参数包括以下一项或多项:数据包大小、数据包周期、数据包到达时间、数据包生存时间、接收窗口、以太网类型、以及以太网分组信息。The receiving module is configured to receive each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters and the QFI corresponding to each group of Ethernet protocol layer parameters in one or more groups of Ethernet protocol layer parameters from the core network device, and The QFI corresponding to the group Ethernet protocol layer parameter is used by the communication device to determine the QFI corresponding to the uplink data according to the Ethernet protocol layer parameter of the uplink data, and the Ethernet protocol layer parameter includes one or more of the following: data packet Size, packet period, packet arrival time, packet lifetime, receive window, Ethernet type, and Ethernet packet information.
  25. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求8-11中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求12所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising instructions, which when running on a communication device, causes the communication device to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-7, or causes the The communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 8-11, or causes the communication device to execute the method according to claim 12.
  26. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括如权利要求13-19任一项所述的通信装置以及权利要求20-23任一项所述的通信装置。A communication system, characterized in that the communication system comprises the communication device according to any one of claims 13-19 and the communication device according to any one of claims 20-23.
  27. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:处理器;A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes: a processor;
    所述处理器用于读取存储器中的计算机执行指令,并执行所述计算机执行指令,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法;或者,执行如权利要求8-11中任意一项所述的方法;或者,执行如权利要求12所述的方法。The processor is configured to read the computer-executable instructions in the memory, and execute the computer-executable instructions, so that the communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 1-7; or, executes the method as claimed in claim 8. -11 The method according to any one of them; or, the method according to claim 12 is executed.
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:处理器和存储器;A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes: a processor and a memory;
    所述存储器用于存储计算机执行指令,当所述处理器执行所述计算机执行指令时,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法;或者,执行如权利要求8-11中任意 一项所述的方法;或者,执行如权利要求12所述的方法。The memory is used to store computer-executable instructions, and when the processor executes the computer-executed instructions, the communication device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-7; or, execute the method as claimed in any one of claims 1-7; The method according to any one of 8-11; or, the method according to claim 12 is executed.
  29. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序或指令被处理器执行时,执行如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法;或者,执行如权利要求8-11中任意一项所述的方法;或者,执行如权利要求12所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium having computer programs or instructions stored thereon, wherein when the computer programs or instructions are executed by a processor, the method according to any one of claims 1-7 is executed; Or, execute the method according to any one of claims 8-11; or, execute the method according to claim 12.
PCT/CN2020/093275 2019-06-24 2020-05-29 Method, apparatus and system for transmitting parameters WO2020259206A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910551590.X 2019-06-24
CN201910551590.XA CN112135329B (en) 2019-06-24 2019-06-24 Parameter transmission method, device and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020259206A1 true WO2020259206A1 (en) 2020-12-30

Family

ID=73849891

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/093275 WO2020259206A1 (en) 2019-06-24 2020-05-29 Method, apparatus and system for transmitting parameters

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112135329B (en)
WO (1) WO2020259206A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024092697A1 (en) * 2022-11-04 2024-05-10 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, apparatus and system

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109104448A (en) * 2017-06-20 2018-12-28 华为技术有限公司 Conversation managing method and device
US20190116518A1 (en) * 2017-10-12 2019-04-18 Intel IP Corporation Device requested protocol data unit session modification in the 5g system
US20190132251A1 (en) * 2017-10-31 2019-05-02 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and system for supporting multiple qos flows for unstructured pdu sessions

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103546984A (en) * 2012-07-13 2014-01-29 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Method and equipment for accessing mobile communication system
CN107592974B (en) * 2015-03-02 2023-06-16 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for providing service in wireless communication system
KR102499481B1 (en) * 2016-08-01 2023-02-14 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for managing data communication in wireless communication network
US11006316B2 (en) * 2017-10-16 2021-05-11 Ofinno, Llc Header compression for ethernet frame

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109104448A (en) * 2017-06-20 2018-12-28 华为技术有限公司 Conversation managing method and device
US20190116518A1 (en) * 2017-10-12 2019-04-18 Intel IP Corporation Device requested protocol data unit session modification in the 5g system
US20190132251A1 (en) * 2017-10-31 2019-05-02 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and system for supporting multiple qos flows for unstructured pdu sessions

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112135329A (en) 2020-12-25
CN112135329B (en) 2021-12-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12010592B2 (en) Sidelink communications method and apparatus
EP3965440A1 (en) Sidelink communication method and apparatus, and storage medium
US10880789B2 (en) Method for establishing a fronthaul interface, method for performing access for a UE, method and apparatus for performing a handover for a UE, data forwarding method, user equipment and base station
US20230023571A1 (en) Service processing method for proximity service, device, and system
US20200221538A1 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
US20190223154A1 (en) Message Sending Method And Apparatus
US20220022168A1 (en) Communication method and device
US11689958B2 (en) Communication method, device, and system
WO2016173078A1 (en) Data transfer method and system, and ue having relay function
WO2019242756A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020048517A1 (en) Rrc connection method, device, and system
WO2022017285A1 (en) Packet forwarding method, apparatus and system
US20240214864A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
WO2022012361A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021115429A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020259206A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for transmitting parameters
WO2021163894A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus based on relay
WO2021056703A1 (en) Information updating method, device, and system
WO2021042381A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system
WO2020216083A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus, and terminal device
WO2021134561A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
CN111373834B (en) Client device, access network device, method and computer program for establishing a data radio bearer
WO2023207838A1 (en) Communication method, and device
WO2023246746A1 (en) Communication method and related device
WO2022237505A1 (en) Communication method, device and system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20830717

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20830717

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1